You are on page 1of 477

At a glance

Cockpit

Left-hand-drive vehicles

P68.10-2862-31

16 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


At a glance
Cockpit

Function Page Function Page Function Page


1 Combination switch 6 Linguatronic lever* – e Adjusts the steering 38
see the separate wheel
 Main-beam head- 49
Operating Instructions Switches the steering 289
lamps
7 Parktronic* warning 253 wheel heating* on/off
 Turn signals 50
display f Opens the bonnet 306
 Windscreen wipers 50
8 Overhead control panel 27 g Parking brake 53
2 Cruise control lever
9 Opens the spectacles/ 282 h Releases the parking 47
 Cruise control 223 mobile phone compart- brake
 Distronic* 227 ment
j Door control panel 28
 Speedtronic 237 a Opens the glove com- 282
partment k Light switch 121
 SBC Stop* 242
b Glove compartment 282 l Cleans the headlamps* 175
3 Instrument cluster 22
c Centre console 25
4 Multi-function 24
steering wheel d Ignition lock 31

5 Horn

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 17


At a glance
Cockpit

Right-hand-drive vehicles

P68.10-2862-31

18 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


At a glance
Cockpit

Function Page Function Page Function Page


1 Combination switch 6 Linguatronic lever* – e Adjusts the steering 38
see the separate wheel
 Main-beam head- 49
Operating Instructions Switches the steering 289
lamps
7 Parktronic* warning 253 wheel heating* on/off
 Turn signals 50
display f Opens the bonnet 306
 Windscreen wipers 50
8 Overhead control panel 27 g Parking brake 53
2 Cruise control lever
9 Opens the spectacles/ 282 h Releases the parking 47
 Cruise control 223 mobile phone compart- brake
 Distronic* 227 ment
j Door control panel 28
 Speedtronic 237 a Opens the glove com- 282
partment k Light switch 121
 SBC Stop* 242
b Glove compartment 282 l Cleans the headlamps* 175
3 Instrument cluster 20
c Centre console 25
4 Multi-function 24
steering wheel d Ignition lock 31

5 Horn

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 19


At a glance
Instrument cluster

Kilometres

E2_F1
B1LL_KM_P54.32-2299-21
B1RL_MILES_P54.32-2300-21
_
_

20 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


At a glance
Instrument cluster

Function Page Function Page Function Page


1 Turn signal indicator 50 8 Rev counter with c Automatic transmis- 165
lamp, left 1 Restraint sys- 397 sion* selector lever
2 ABS/ESP warning 395 tems warning lamp position display
lamp - ABS indicator 396 d Clock with 146
3 Speedometer 129 lamp q Preglow indica- 45
4 Segments 129 < Seat belt warning 401 tor lamp

5 Multi-function 130 lamp ± Engine diagnos- 400


display A Main-beam indi- 125 tic indicator lamp

Depending on setting cator lamp — Brake indicator 397


in the control system 9 Coolant temperature 399 lamp

 Outside gauge with e Fuel gauge with


temperature1 D Coolant warning W Reserve fuel 400
 Digital speedome- lamp warning lamp
ter a Automatic transmis- 165 f Rotary knob/ 128
Status line sion*: reset button
gearshift program dis- (R button)
Trip meter play
6 Distance warning 227 b Total distance recorder
lamp*2 1 Except for the United Kingdom. The
speed is always displayed in km/h.
7 Turn signal indicator 50 2 On vehicles without Distronic* the sym-
lamp, right bol lights up briefly, but has no function.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 21


At a glance
Instrument cluster

Miles

E2_F1
B1LL_KM_P54.32-2299-21
B1RL_MILES_P54.32-2300-21
_
_

22 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


At a glance
Instrument cluster

Function Page Function Page Function Page


1 Turn signal indicator 50 8 Rev counter with c Automatic transmis- 165
lamp, left 1 Restraint sys- 397 sion* selector lever
2 ABS/ESP warning 395 tems warning lamp position display
lamp - ABS indicator 396 d Clock with 146
3 Speedometer 129 lamp q Preglow indica- 45
4 Segments 129 < Seat belt warning 401 tor lamp

5 Multi-function 130 lamp ± Engine diagnos- 400


display A Main-beam indi- 125 tic indicator lamp

Depending on setting cator lamp — Brake indicator 397


in the control system 9 Coolant temperature 399 lamp

 Outside gauge with e Fuel gauge with


temperature1 D Coolant warning W Reserve fuel 400
 Digital speedome- lamp warning lamp
ter a Automatic transmis- 165 f Rotary knob/ 128
Status line sion*: reset button
gearshift program dis- (R button)
Trip meter play
6 Distance warning 227 b Total distance recorder
lamp*2 1 Except for the United Kingdom. The
speed is always displayed in km/h.
7 Turn signal indicator 50 2 On vehicles without Distronic* the sym-
lamp, right bol lights up briefly, but has no function.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 23


At a glance
Multi-function steering wheel

Function Page Function Page


1 Multi-function display 130 4 Jumps from one menu
Controlling the oper- 130 to another
ating system è Forwards
2 Selects a submenu or ÿ Back
adjusts the volume 5 Scrolls within a menu
æ Up/increases j Forwards
the volume
k Back
ç Down/ de-
creases the
volume
3 Making a phone call
s Accepts a call
Starts dialling

P46.10-2385-31 t Hangs up
Rejects an in-
coming call

24 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


At a glance
Centre console
 Centre console
Upper section Function Page Function Page
1 Controls Thermatic 181 7 Switches the seat ven- 116
Controls 4-zone- 192 tilation* on the left-
Thermotronic* hand side on/off

Switches the rear win- 180 8 Switches the seat 117


dow heating on/off heating* on the left-
hand side on/off
2 Controls COMAND
APS* and Audio sys- 9 Saloon:
tem* – see the sepa- Rolls the rear window 179
rate Operating blind* up/down
E2_F1 Instructions Estate:
B2_P68.20-2919-31 3 Switches the seat 117 Switches the rear 52
heating* on the right- windscreen wiper
hand side on/off on/off

4 Switches the seat ven- 116 a Folds back the rear 110
tilation* on the right- seat head restraints
hand side on/off b Switches the hazard 125
5 Unlocks the vehicle 104 warning lamps on/off

6 Opening button for 282 c Passenger airbag 70


stowage compartment warning lamp
or CD changer* – see d Locks the vehicle 104
the separate Operating e Activates/deactivates 79
Instructions ESP

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 25


At a glance
Centre console

Lower section Function Page Function Page


1 Opens/closes 287 6 Sets Airmatic DC* 250
the ashtray 7 Sets the vehicle's 248
2 KEYLESS GO* button 32 level*
3 Manual transmission: 163 8 Distronic*: 234
Gear lever Sets the specified
Automatic transmis- 165 minimum distance
sion*: 9 Distronic*: 234
Selector lever Switches the distance
4 Switches auxiliary 207 warning function*
P68.20-2761-31 on/off
heating*/ventilation*
on/off a Automatic transmis- 170
5 Deactivates 255 sion*:
Parktronic* Selects the gearshift
program

26 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


At a glance
Overhead control panel
 Overhead control panel
Function Page Function Page
1 Switches the rear inte- 126 7 Primes/deactivates 85
rior lights on/off the interior motion
2 Switches the interior 126 sensor*
lighting automatic 8 Rear-view mirror 39
function on/off 175
3 Switches the front in- 126 9 Reading lamps 126
terior lighting on/off
a Transmitter buttons 297
P82.00-2172-31 4 Switches the right- 126 for the garage door
hand reading lamp opener*
on/off
b Primes/deactivates 84
5 Opens/closes the 213 tow-away protection*
sliding/tilting sun-
roof* c Ambient lighting* 126

or d Interior light 126

Opens/closes the 217 e Switches the left-hand 126


panorama sliding reading lamp on/off
sunroof*
6 Activates the TeleAid 293
emergency call
system*

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 27


At a glance
Door control panel

Function Page Function Page


P72.10-2353-31 1 Opens the door 95 6 Saloon:
Boot lid remote un- 99
2 Adjusts the seat elec- 34
locking feature
trically*
Saloon:
3 Stores settings for the 119 Boot lid remote open- 99
seat, exterior mirrors ing switch* for
and steering wheel* opening/closing the
4 Adjusts the exterior 40 boot lid automatically
mirrors Estate:
5 Opens/closes the side 211 Tailgate remote open- 100
windows ing switch* for opening
the tailgate automati-
cally

28 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Opening

The "Getting started" section contains


Unlocking with the remote
brief details of the basic functions of
control Risk of accident G
the vehicle. You should read this sec-
tion particularly thoroughly if this is Your vehicle can be started with the
your first Mercedes-Benz vehicle. key. This can also be used to acti-
If you are already familiar with the basic vate other functions, e.g. opening
functions described here, the "Controls the windows.
in detail" section will help you with
more detailed information. You will find Do not leave children unsupervised
P 80.35-2076-31
the reference to the appropriate page in the vehicle as they could acciden-
number at the end of each section. 69 tally activate these functions.
Therefore, take the key with you
when leaving the vehicle, even if you
are only leaving it for a short while.

Key with remote control


1 ‹ Locking button
2 Š Unlocking button for boot
lid/tailgate*
3 ΠUnlocking button

30 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Opening

 Press the Πunlocking button on Key positions i


the remote control.
The indicator and warning lamps
The turn signals flash once. The ve- light up when you switch on the ig-
hicle unlocks. The locking knobs in nition. They go out when the engine
the doors pop up. The anti-theft P 54.25-2552-31 is running. This shows that the indi-
alarm system* is deactivated. The cator and warning lamps for each
surround lighting also comes on system are operational.
when it is dark if this function is en-
abled in the control system. You will find further information in the
"Controls in detail" section
i ( page 88).
The SBC brake system is activated
( page 80). Ignition lock

 Get into the vehicle and insert the 0 To remove the key
key in the ignition lock. 1 Power supply for some consumers,
such as the seat adjustment func-
tion
2 Ignition (power supply for all con-
sumers) and drive position
3 To start the engine ( page 45)

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 31


Getting started
Opening

Unlocking with KEYLESS GO* KEYLESS GO positions


You can unlock and start your vehicle
Risk of accident G Pressing the KEYLESS GO button on the
without the remote control button using selector lever without depressing the
KEYLESS GO. Your vehicle can be started using a brake pedal corresponds to the differ-
valid KEYLESS GO key. This can also ent key positions in the ignition lock
i be used to activate other functions, ( page 31).
The KEYLESS GO key must be out- e.g. adjusting the seats and opening If you depress the brake pedal while
side the vehicle to unlock it. the windows. pressing the KEYLESS GO button, the
Do not leave children unsupervised engine starts immediately.
 Pull the door handle.
in the vehicle as they could acciden-
The turn signals flash once. The ve- i
tally activate these functions.
hicle unlocks. The locking knobs in If there is a key in the ignition lock,
the doors pop up. The anti-theft Take the KEYLESS GO key with you it has priority over the KEYLESS GO
alarm system* is deactivated. The when leaving the vehicle, even if you function.
surround lighting also comes on are only leaving it for a short while.
when it is dark if this function is en-
abled in the control system.

i
The SBC brake system is activated
( page 80).

 Get into the vehicle.

32 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Opening

Position 1 Position 2 (ignition)


 Press KEYLESS GO button 1 once.  Press KEYLESS GO button 1
P 54.25-3096-31 You can now adjust the seats, for twice.
example.
i
i The power supply will be discon-
The power supply will be discon- nected again if you press the
nected again if you press the KEYLESS GO button once while
KEYLESS GO button twice while this position is selected.
this position is selected.
1 KEYLESS GO button i
The indicator and warning lamps
Position 0 light up when you switch on the ig-
The on-board electronics have the sta- nition. They go out when the engine
tus 0, the same as the key having been is running. This shows that the indi-
removed from the ignition, until you cator and warning lamps for each
press KEYLESS GO button 1. system are operational.

You will find further information in the


"Controls in detail" section
( page 91).

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 33


Getting started
Adjusting

Seats
You can adjust the seats either electri-
Risk of injury G  The distance to the pedals is
such that you can depress them
cally or manually, depending on your fully and your legs are not com-
vehicle's equipment. Make sure that nobody can be
pletely outstretched.
trapped as you adjust the seat.
 The head restraint supports the
Risk of accident G Your seat must be adjusted in such
a way that you can wear the seat
back of your head at about eye
level.
Only adjust the driver's seat when belt correctly ( page 43).
You could otherwise receive severe
the vehicle is stationary. You will Position your seat in such a way or even fatal injuries in the event of
otherwise be distracted and could that: sudden braking or an accident.
lose control of the vehicle and cause  You are seated as far as possi-
an accident as a result of the seat ble from the front airbag.
movement.
Ensure the following:
 The backrest is almost vertical.
 Your arms are slightly bent
when you are holding the steer-
ing wheel.

34 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Adjusting

Adjusting the seat manually and Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Seat height
electrically  Pull handle 1 up.  Make sure that the key is in position
 Push the seat forwards or back- 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
wards.  Slide switch 3 up or down in the
 Release handle 1 again.
direction of the arrow.
P 91.10-2566-31 Make sure that you hear the seat
Backrest angle
click into position.
 Make sure that the key is in position
Seat cushion angle 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
 Slide switch 4 forwards or back-
Adjust the seat cushion angle so that
your thighs are lightly supported. wards in the direction of the arrow.

 Pull lever 2 upwards.


The seat cushion angle is tilted up-
1 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment wards by one detent.
2 Seat cushion angle or
3 Seat height  Press the lever downwards.
4 Backrest angle
The seat cushion angle is tilted
downwards by one detent.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 35


Getting started
Adjusting

Head restraint height Adjusting the seat electrically*


The release catch is located on the top Risk of injury G
of the seat backrest.
Make sure that the back of your
Risk of injury G
head is supported by the centre of
The seats can be adjusted when the
the head restraint at about eye level.
key is removed from the ignition and
This reduces the risk of injury to the
P 91.16-2115-31 the door is open.
head and neck in the event of an ac-
24 cident or similar situations. For this reason, children should nev-
er be left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle.
Head restraint angle

 Make sure that:


 the key is in position 1 or 2 in
1 Release catch
the ignition lock
 Adjust the height of the head re-
P91.16-2116-31 or
straint manually. Press release
catch 1 to lower the head re- 25  the appropriate door is open
straint.

 Adjust the angle of the head re-


straint manually. Pull or push on the
bottom of the head restraint.

36 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Adjusting

The switches are located on the door Seat cushion angle Head restraint angle
control panel.
 Slide switch 5 up or down in the
direction of the arrow until your
thighs are lightly supported.

P 91.10-2425-31 Backrest angle P91.16-2116-31


74  Slide switch 2 forwards or back-
wards in the direction of the arrow.

Head restraint height


 Slide switch 3 up or down in the
direction of the arrow.  Adjust the angle of the head re-
1 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment straint manually. Pull or push on the
2 Backrest angle bottom of the head restraint.
3 Head restraint height Risk of injury G
4 Seat height
5 Seat cushion angle Make sure that the back of your
head is supported by the centre of
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment the head restraint at about eye level.
 Slide switch 1 forwards or back-
This reduces the risk of injury to the
wards in the direction of the arrow. head and neck in the event of an ac-
cident or similar situations.
Seat height
 Slide switch 4 up or down in the
direction of the arrow.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 37


Getting started
Adjusting

Adjusting the steering wheel  Adjust the steering wheel to the re-
Steering wheel
manually quired position.

Risk of accident G The handle is located under the steer-


ing column.
When doing this make sure that:
 The steering wheel can be
Only adjust the steering wheel when reached with your arms slightly
the vehicle is stationary. Only drive bent
with the steering wheel locked in po-  Your legs can move freely
sition.  All the displays in the instru-
The electrically-adjustable steering ment cluster can be clearly
wheel* can be adjusted when the seen
key is removed from the ignition and  Push handle 1 in fully until you
the door is open. hear it engage fully.
P 46.15-2083-31 The steering wheel position is
Do not, therefore, leave children un-
supervised in the vehicle as they locked.
1 Release handle
could be trapped as the steering 2 Steering column height
wheel is adjusted. 3 Steering column fore-and-aft
adjustment
 Pull handle 1 out completely.
The steering column is unlocked.

38 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Adjusting

Adjusting the steering wheel Steering column fore-and-aft Mirrors


electrically* adjustment
Before starting off, adjust the rear-view
The lever is located on the left under the  Push the lever forwards or back- mirror and the exterior mirrors so that
steering wheel. wards in the direction of arrow 1 you get a good overview of road and
until your arms are slightly bent traffic conditions.
when you are holding the steering
wheel. Rear-view mirror
 Adjust the rear-view mirror manual-
P 46.15-2071-31 Steering column height
ly.
 Push the lever up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 2. When doing
this make sure that:
 You can move your legs freely
 You can see all the displays in
1 Steering column fore-and-aft ad- the instrument cluster clearly
justment
2 Steering column height You will find further information in the
"Controls in detail" section:
 Make sure that:
 Easy-entry system for the driver
 the key is in position 1 or 2 in
( page 106)
the ignition lock
 Storing the steering wheel position
or
( page 119)
 the appropriate door is open

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 39


Getting started
Adjusting

Exterior mirrors The buttons are located on the door  Press button 1 for the right-hand
control panel. mirror or button 2 for the left-hand
mirror.
Risk of accident G  Press adjustment button 3 at the
top or bottom or to the right or to
The exterior mirrors reduce the size
the left until you have adjusted the
of the image. The objects are actual- P 88.70-2139-31 mirror to the correct position.
ly closer than they appear.
i
The convex exterior mirrors give a
larger field of view.
Your exterior mirrors are automati-
cally heated at low outside temper-
1 Right-hand exterior mirror
atures.
2 Left-hand exterior mirror
3 Adjustment button
You will find further information in the
 Make sure that the ignition is "Controls in detail" section
switched on. ( page 175).
All the lights in the instrument clus-
ter are lit.

40 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Driving
 Driving
Wearing seat belts
Risk of accident G  The seat belt must pass closely
over your body and must not be
Do not keep any objects in the driv- Risk of injury G twisted. You should therefore
avoid wearing bulky clothing
er's footwell. Make sure that floor- (e.g. winter coats). The shoulder
A seat belt which is not worn cor-
mats or carpets in the driver's belt section must be routed over
rectly, or which has not been en-
footwell the middle of your shoulder –
gaged in the seat belt buckle never over your neck or under
 do not obstruct the pedals correctly, cannot perform its intend- your arm – and pulled tight
 are securely fastened ed protective function. Under cer- against your upper body. The lap
Objects could otherwise get caught tain circumstances this could even belt must cross over your lap as
between the pedals if you acceler- cause severe or fatal injuries. low down as possible at all
times, i.e. over your hip joints –
ate or brake suddenly. You will then Make sure that all occupants – es-
not across your stomach or low-
not be able to brake, operate the pecially pregnant women – wear er abdomen. If necessary, tight-
clutch pedal, or accelerate as in- their seat belts correctly at all times: en the belt strap by pulling it
tended. This could lead to accidents down slightly and retighten in
and injury. the direction of the inertia reel.
 Do not route the belt strap over
sharp-edged or easily broken
objects, especially if these are
located on or in your clothing,
e.g. spectacles, pencils, keys,
etc. The seat belt strap could be
damaged and you could be in-
jured.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 41


Getting started
Driving

 Only one person should use


each seat belt at any one time.
Follow the manufacturer's in-
stallation instructions when fit-
Risk of injury G
Never carry children on your lap, ting the child restraint system.
By design, airbags are not activated
since the child will then no long-  Do not secure any objects with a
er be secured in the event of an in all accident situations, since a
seat belt if it is also being used correctly fastened seat belt will of-
accident, braking or a sudden by one of the vehicle's occu-
change in direction, which could ten be sufficient for providing an ef-
pants.
result in severe or fatal injuries fective degree of protection. Airbags
to the child and other occu- do not replace seat belts in any way.
pants. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
 Persons less than 1.50 m tall
Risk of injury G injuries, make sure that all occu-
(5 feet) cannot wear the seat pants – especially pregnant women
A seat belt only offers its intended
belts correctly. For this reason, – are strapped in correctly at all
secure persons less than 1.50 m degree of protection if the backrest
times, have adopted a normal sitting
(5 feet) tall in specially de- is positioned as close to the vertical
position, and that the seat is posi-
signed, suitable restraint sys- as possible and the occupant is sit-
tioned as close to the vertical as
tems. ting upright. Avoid seat positions
possible ( page 34).
 Children less than 1.50 m that do not allow the seat belt to be
(5 feet) tall or under 12 years of routed correctly ( page 34). Posi-
age cannot wear the seat belts tion the backrest as vertically as
properly. Always secure these possible. Do not drive with the back-
children in suitable child re- rest reclined too far back.
straint systems on suitable vehi-
cle seats ( page 66).

42 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Driving

 Pull the belt smoothly from belt


reel 1. The seat belts can then neither func-
tion nor perform their protective
 Route the belt over your shoulder.
function as intended.
 Click belt tongue 2 into buckle 3.
P 91.40-2300-31 Do not route the belt strap over
 If necessary, adjust the belt to the
sharp edges. It could tear.
correct height ( page 44).
Make sure that the seat belt is not
 Pull the shoulder belt upwards to
caught in the door or in the seat ad-
tighten the belt across your lap if
necessary. justment mechanism. It could be
damaged.

Risk of injury G Check regularly that the seat belts


are not damaged.
You could be injured in an accident Never carry out any modifications to
if you use seat belts which: the seat belts yourself. They might
 are damaged not function properly any more.

 have been subjected to a load in Always have seat belts which have
an accident been damaged or subjected to a
heavy load in an accident replaced
 have been modified
1 Belt reel at a qualified specialist workshop
2 Belt tongue which has the necessary specialist
3 Buckle knowledge and tools to carry out the
4 Release button work required.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 43


Getting started
Driving

Belt height adjustment Raising the belt


Mercedes-Benz recommends a
You can adjust the seat belt height on  Push the belt guide up.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
the following seats: The belt guide will engage in various
this purpose. In particular, work rel-
evant to safety or on safety-related  Driver's seat positions.
systems must be carried out at a  Front-passenger seat
qualified specialist workshop. Lowering the belt
 Outer rear seats
 Press and hold release button 1.
Adjust the height so that the belt pass-
es over the middle of your shoulder.  Move the belt guide to the required
height.
 Let go of release button 1 and en-
sure that the belt guide has en-
P 91.40-2312-31 gaged.
Please observe the information on
wearing seat belts correctly
( page 41).

1 Release button

44 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Driving

Starting the engine Automatic transmission* Starting the engine with the key

Vehicles with a petrol engine


Risk of poisoning G  Turn the key to position 3 in the ig-
E2_F1 nition lock ( page 31) and release
Never leave the engine running in
B5_P27.60-2346-31 it.
enclose spaces. The exhaust gases
contain carbon monoxide. Inhaling The engine starts automatically.
exhaust fumes constitutes a health
Vehicles with a diesel engine
hazard and could lead to loss of con-
sciousness or even death.  Turn the key to position 2 in the ig-
nition lock ( page 31).
Gearshift pattern The q preglow indicator lamp in
! the instrument cluster lights up.
P Park position with selector lever
Do not depress the accelerator
lock  As soon as the q preglow indi-
pedal when starting the engine.
R Reverse gear cator lamp goes out, turn the key to
N Neutral position 3 in the ignition lock and
i D Drive position release it.
If you depress the brake when start-  Before starting the engine, make The engine starts automatically.
ing the engine, the pedal travel is sure that the selector lever is in po-
longer than usual and the pedal re- sition P. i
sistance is low. You can start the engine without
You will find further information about
If you depress the brake after start- automatic transmission in the "Controls preglow if the engine is warm.
ing the engine, the pedal travel and in detail" section ( page 165).
pedal resistance return to normal.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 45


Getting started
Driving

Starting the engine with KEYLESS Vehicles with a diesel engine


GO*  Depress the brake pedal.
The selector lever lock will be re-
Risk of accident G P 54.25-3096-31
leased.
 Press KEYLESS GO button 1 once.
Your vehicle can be started as long
Preglow is activated and the engine
as the KEYLESS GO key is in the ve-
starts automatically.
hicle. For this reason, children
should never be left unsupervised in You can start the engine without pre-
the vehicle. They could unintention- glow if the engine is warm:
1 KEYLESS GO button
ally start the vehicle.
 Press and hold KEYLESS GO button
Take the KEYLESS GO key with you Vehicles with a petrol engine 1 until the engine is running.
when leaving the vehicle, even if you  Depress the brake pedal.
are only leaving it for a short while.
The selector lever lock will be re-
leased.
You may start your vehicle with no key
in the ignition lock using the KEYLESS  Press KEYLESS GO button 1 once.
GO button on the selector lever. The engine starts automatically.

46 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Driving

6-speed manual transmission Starting the petrol engine Parking brake


 Turn the key to position 3 in the ig-
nition lock ( page 31) and release
it as soon as the engine is running.
E2_F1
P 42.20-2090-31
B3_P26.60-2197-31 Starting the diesel engine
 Turn the key to position 2 in the ig-
nition lock ( page 31).
The q preglow indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up.
 As soon as the q preglow indi-
Gearshift pattern cator lamp goes out, turn the key to 1 Parking brake
1 – 6 Forward gears position 3 in the ignition lock and 2 Release handle
R Reverse gear release it as soon as the engine is
 Before starting the engine, make
sure that the transmission is in neu-
running.
Risk of accident G
tral. i
Never leave children unsupervised
 Apply the parking brake
You can start the engine without
preglow if the engine is warm. in the vehicle. They could release
( page 47). the parking brake. This could lead to
You will find further information about a serious or fatal accident.
6-speed transmission in the "Controls
in detail" section ( page 163).

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 47


Getting started
Driving

 Depress the brake pedal and hold it Upshifts take place at higher engine
i
down. speeds after a cold start. This helps the
The vehicle will lock itself centrally catalytic converter to reach its operat-
On vehicles with automatic trans- once you have pulled away. The
mission* the selector lever lock is ing temperature more quickly.
locking knobs in the doors drop
released. down.
6-speed manual transmission
 Release the parking brake. To do You can open the doors from the in-
this, pull handle 2.  Depress the clutch pedal.
side at any time.
The 3 indicator lamp in the in-  Select either first or reverse gear.
You can also switch off the auto-
strument cluster goes out. matic door lock ( page 152).  Release the clutch pedal slowly and
depress the accelerator pedal.
i
Automatic transmission*
The SBC brake system is activated !
( see page 80).  Apply the brake.
Change gear in good time and do
The selector lever lock will be re- not exceed the maximum speed for
Pulling away leased. each gear ( page 450).
 Move the selector lever to position Wherever possible, avoid letting the
! D or R. wheels spin. You could otherwise
Reverse gear may only be selected damage the drive train.
when the vehicle is stationary, oth- i
erwise the transmission could be Wait for the shift process to com-
damaged. plete before pulling away.
Do not drive at high engine speeds
until the engine has warmed up.  Carefully press the accelerator ped-
This will protect the engine. al.

48 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Driving

Switching on the headlamps i


Risk of accident G On some country-specific vehicle
Dipped-beam headlamps models, the dipped-beam head-
Do not downshift until the speed at lamps come on as soon as the igni-
The light switch is located between the
which you are driving is within the tion is switched on.
steering wheel and the driver's door.
permissible range for the required
gear. Main-beam headlamps
Do not change down for additional The combination switch is located on
engine braking on a slippery road the left of the steering wheel.
P 54.25-2787-31
surface. The drive wheels could lose
traction and the vehicle could skid.
You could lose control of your vehi-
cle and cause an accident.
P 54.30-5310-31

Light switch
1 Lights off
2 Dipped-beam headlamps on
 Turn the light switch to B.
Combination switch
1 Main-beam headlamps
2 Headlamp flash

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 49


Getting started
Driving

 Press the combination switch for-  Push the combination switch up 1


Windscreen wipers
wards 1. or down 2.
The combination switch is located on
The main-beam headlamps come The corresponding turn signal indi- the left of the steering wheel.
on. cator lamp flashes in the instru-
The A main-beam indicator ment cluster.
lamp in the instrument cluster The combination switch returns to
lights up. its original position automatically
You will find further information about after large steering movements. P 54.25-2555-31
the lights in the "Controls in detail" sec-
tion ( page 121). i
Press the combination switch briefly
Turn signals
to indicate a minor change in direc-
The combination switch is located on tion. The appropriate turn signal will
the left of the steering wheel. flash three times.
Combination switch
1 Single wipe
2 To switch on the windscreen wipers
P54.25-2554-31  Make sure that the ignition is
switched on.

Combination switch
1 Right-hand turn signal
2 Left-hand turn signal

50 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Driving

Switching on the windscreen Wiping the windscreen using Intermittent wipe continues when
wipers washer fluid the doors are closed again and:
 Turn the combination switch to the  Push the combination switch be-  when the clutch is depressed
correct setting depending on the in- yond the pressure point in the di- on vehicles with manual trans-
tensity of the rain. rection of arrow 1. mission
0 Windscreen wipers off The windscreen wipers will wipe  when the selector lever is
I Intermittent wipe (the wiper with windscreen washer fluid. moved to D or R on vehicles
sweep interval is dependent on with automatic transmission*
i
how heavy the rain is)
Wipe the windscreen using wind- The rain sensor controls the wind-
II Normal wipe screen washer fluid even when it is screen wipers automatically depending
III Rapid wipe raining. By doing so, you will avoid on the intensity of the rain.
smears on the windscreen.
i  Make sure that the ignition is
switched on.
You can use position I as the univer- Intermittent wipe
sal position. The appropriate wiping  Set the combination switch to posi-
frequency is set automatically, de- i tion I.
pending on the intensity of the rain. If you have selected the intermit- There will be one wiper sweep and
tent setting, wiping is interrupted the wipe intervals will then be con-
Single wipe as soon as the driver's door or trolled according to the intensity of
 Push the combination switch briefly
front-passenger door is opened. the rain.
up to the pressure point in the di- This protects people getting into
rection of arrow 1. and leaving the vehicle from being
sprayed with water.
The windscreen wipers will wipe
once without windscreen washer
fluid.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 51


Getting started
Driving

Rear window wiper for Estate Switching on intermittent wipe Wiping with washer fluid
The switch is located on the centre con-  Press upper section 1 of the  Press and hold lower section 3 of
sole. switch. the switch.
Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The rear window is wiped for a fur-
ther five seconds after the switch is
Switching off intermittent wipe released.
 Press upper section 1 of the
switch again.
P54.25-3153-31
Bild folgt Indicator lamp 2 goes out.

1 Intermittent wipe
2 Indicator lamp
3 Rear window washer system
 Make sure that the ignition is
switched on.

i
The rear window wiper comes on
automatically if you engage reverse
gear while the windscreen wipers
are on.

52 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Parking and locking
 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first trip.
You have stopped your vehicle and have Risk of fire G Parking brake
parked properly. End your journey as
follows. Make sure that the exhaust system
does not come into contact with
G easily ignitable material such as dry P 42.20-2090-31
Risk of accident
grass or petrol. The material could
Only remove the key from the igni- otherwise ignite and set parts of the
tion lock when the vehicle is station- vehicle alight.
ary since you cannot steer the
vehicle with the key removed.
Never leave children unsupervised 1 Parking brake
in the vehicle. They could release 2 Release handle
the parking brake. This could lead to  Depress parking brake 1 firmly.
a serious or fatal accident.
The 3 indicator lamp in the in-
strument cluster lights up if the en-
gine is running.

i
On steep slopes, turn the front
wheels towards the kerb.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 53


Getting started
Parking and locking

Stopping the engine Vehicles with automatic trans- With KEYLESS GO*
mission*  Press the KEYLESS GO button on
Vehicles with 6-speed manual  Move the selector lever to P. the selector lever.
transmission The engine stops and all the lights
 Select either first or reverse gear. With the key in the instrument cluster go out.
 Turn the key to position 0 in the ig- The on-board electronics have the
 Turn the key to position 0 in the ig-
nition lock ( page 31) and remove status 1 ( page 31).
nition lock ( page 31) and remove
it. it.  Press the seat belt release button
The immobiliser is activated. and guide the belt tongue back to
The immobiliser is activated.
the seat belt guide ( page 43).
 Press the seat belt release button i
and guide the belt tongue back to
The key can only be removed when
the seat belt guide ( page 43).
the selector lever is in position P.

 Press the seat belt release button


and guide the belt tongue back to
the seat belt guide ( page 43).

54 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Getting started
Parking and locking

Locking with the remote control  Press locking button 1 on the door
Locking
handle.
 Press the ‹ locking button on

Risk of injury G the remote control ( page 30). The locking knobs in the doors drop
down. The turn signals flash three
The locking knobs in the doors drop
times.
Make sure that nobody can be down. The turn signals flash three
trapped as you close the doors. times. The immobiliser is activated.

Locking with KEYLESS GO* i


 Get out of the vehicle and close the
The on-board electronics have the
doors.
status 0 after the door is opened,
the same as the key having been re-
moved from the ignition.
P 80.30-2163-31
You will find further information about
closing in the "Controls in detail" sec-
tion ( page 91).

1 Locking button on the door handle

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 55


Safety
Occupant safety

This section contains all the most im-


Airbags
portant information about your vehi- Risk of injury G
cle's restraint systems.
The restraint systems are: Work incorrectly carried out on the Risk of injury G
 Seat belts restraint systems could cause them
Airbags can provide additional pro-
to be triggered inadvertently or not
 Belt tensioners and belt force limit- tection in conjunction with a cor-
at all.
ers rectly fastened seat belt. However,
Always have service work carried they are not an alternative to the
 Airbags
out at a qualified specialist work- seat belts.
 Child seats shop which has the necessary spe-
 Child seat recognition To reduce the risk of severe or even
cialist knowledge and tools to carry
fatal injuries caused by the airbags
As independent systems, their protec- out the work required. Mercedes-
inflating in an accident with deceler-
tive functions complement one anoth- Benz recommends a Mercedes-Benz
ation exceeding a predetermined
er. Service Centre for this purpose. In
level, please make sure that:
particular, work relevant to safety or
on safety-related systems must be  all occupants – especially preg-
carried out at a qualified specialist nant women – wear their seat
workshop. belts correctly for every trip.
 Choose a seat position as far
back as possible from the air-
bag, but which still allows you to
drive the vehicle safely.

58 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Occupant safety

 Do not lean forward during the


journey.
Risk of injury G After an airbag has been triggered:
 Do not touch any airbag parts.
 Do not lean on the doors from Correct operation of the airbags can They may be hot.
inside the vehicle. only be guaranteed if:  The airbags in this vehicle de-
 Do not put your feet on the  the front seats are not covered. ploy in two stages. Therefore an
dashboard. airbag which has been triggered
 nothing is placed under the seat
 Only hold the steering wheel by could still inflate.
surface of the front-passenger
the rim. This allows the airbag to seat. Have the airbags replaced at a qual-
inflate fully. ified specialist workshop which has
 the padded boss of the steering
 Do not place any objects on the the necessary specialist knowledge
wheel, the front-passenger air- and tools to carry out the work re-
airbags or between the airbags bag cover, the door trim, the
and the vehicle's occupants. quired. Mercedes-Benz recom-
side trim in the rear and the roof mends a Mercedes-Benz Service
 Do not place any objects on the lining in the area of the window- Centre for this purpose. In particu-
airbags or between the airbags bags are not covered and no lar, work relevant to safety or on
and the vehicle's occupants. stickers or badges are affixed. safety-related systems must be car-
 Do not hang any hard objects,  the restraint systems, including ried out at a qualified specialist
for example coat hangers, on the wiring, have not been modi- workshop.
the grab handles. fied.
 the seats have not been re-
moved, dismantled or modified.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 59


Safety
Occupant safety

Risk of injury G Forward-facing child seats with-


out transponder should only be
If you sell your vehicle, you are un-
der the obligation to make the buyer
used with the front-passenger aware of these points. You should
The airbags will only be able to per-
seat in its rearmost position. therefore pass on this Owner's Man-
form their intended protective func-
 if occupants behave inappropri- ual to the new owner for this pur-
tion if the occupants are wearing
ately or foolishly. pose.
their seat belts correctly
( page 41). Comply with safety regulations
when disposing of airbag units. De-
Airbags inflate within milliseconds
and can therefore cause injury:
Risk of injury G tails of these regulations are availa-
ble at any Mercedes-Benz Service
 if the seats are positioned very Occupants, particularly small chil- Centre.
near to the front airbags. dren, can be severely or fatally in-
This position is particularly dan- jured as a result of inappropriate
gerous for small children and If an airbag is triggered, smoke is emit-
behaviour or if they are in the imme- ted as it inflates. This smoke does not
babies in rearward-facing child diate vicinity of the front-airbag in-
seats on the front-passenger constitute a health hazard, nor does it
flation. imply that a fire has broken out in the
seat. Therefore, only use the
special Mercedes-Benz child Mercedes-Benz recommends that vehicle.
seat with sensor system (trans- you only use the child restraint sys- The fabric of the airbags can cause mi-
ponder) ( page 70) or fit the tems listed ( see page 65). nor abrasions as they inflate rapidly.
rearward-facing child seat on a
rear seat.

60 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Occupant safety

 permanently if the key is turned to The front-passenger airbag will only be


Risk of injury G position 2 in the ignition lock. It triggered if:
goes out if you start the engine  the front-passenger seat is occu-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz The restraint systems are fully opera- pied and
recommends that you use seat cov- tional if the 1 indicator lamp is not  the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warn-
ers which have been tested by lit when the engine is running. ing lamp on the centre console is
Mercedes-Benz and which have a not lit ( page 70).
special tear seam for sidebags. Front airbags
These are available from any The airbags will not trigger in a minor
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. front-end collision. The seat belts will
provide the necessary protection in this
The 1 indicator lamp in the instru- case. P 91.60-2400-31
ment cluster lights up: The driver's airbag and front-passenger
 for about four seconds if you turn airbag are triggered in an accident
the key to position 1 in the ignition where the front-end is subjected to high
lock. It then goes out briefly and acceleration, e.g. a head-on collision.
lights up again permanently

1 Driver's airbag
2 Front-passenger airbag

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 61


Safety
Occupant safety

! The sidebags will not be triggered in a


minor side impact.
Do not place heavy objects on the
front-passenger seat. These could The front-passenger sidebag will only
cause the front-passenger airbag be triggered if the front-passenger seat
P91.60-2569-31
and the front-passenger sidebag to has heavy objects placed on it or if it is
be triggered in an accident. actually occupied.

Sidebags* and windowbags Windowbags


The windowbags are triggered in an ac-
cident:
Estate  in which there is high lateral accel-
1 Windowbag eration, e.g. a side impact
P 91.60-2563-31
2 Rear sidebag*  on the side on which an impact oc-
3 Front sidebag curs
 if the vehicle overturns, in those
Sidebags* cases where their deployment
The sidebags are triggered in an acci- would offer the vehicle's occupants
dent: additional protection
Saloon  in which there is high lateral accel- The windowbags inflate in the area be-
1 Windowbag eration, e.g. a side impact tween the A and C pillars (arrows).
2 Rear sidebag*  on the side on which an impact oc-
3 Front sidebag curs

62 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Occupant safety

Seat belts Belt tensioners, belt force limit-


Never modify seat belts in any way.
ers
In many countries there are laws con- This can cause the belt tensioners to
cerning the use of seat belts and child trigger inadvertently or the seat The front seat belts and the two outside
restraint systems. All occupants should rear seat belts are equipped with belt
belts to fail.
always use the seat belts regardless of tensioners and belt force limiters.
these regulations. Always have work on seat belts car-
These take effect:
ried out at a qualified specialist
You will find information about fasten-  provided the ignition is switched on
ing the seat belts in the "Getting start- workshop which has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to  in front-end and rear-end collisions
ed" section ( page 41).
carry out the work required. where the force of the collision ex-
Mercedes-Benz recommends a ceeds a predetermined level
Risk of injury G Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for  in certain situations if the vehicle
this purpose. In particular, work rel- overturns
Have seat belts which have been
evant to safety or on safety-related Belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in
damaged or subjected to heavy
systems must be carried out at a an accident, pulling them close against
loads in an accident replaced and
qualified specialist workshop. the body. Belt force limiters reduce the
have their anchorages checked. load exerted by the seat belts on the oc-
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz cupants in an accident.
recommends that you only use seat
belts which have been specially ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 63


Safety
Occupant safety

!
Risk of injury G Do not fasten a seat belt if you do Risk of injury G
not intend to secure a person or a
Have belt tensioners which have load. The belt tensioners could be Never leave children alone in your
been triggered replaced at a quali- triggered in an accident if the seat vehicle. They could otherwise, for
fied specialist workshop which has belt tongue is engaged in the buck- example, set the vehicle in motion,
the necessary specialist knowledge le. injure themselves on moving parts
and tools to carry out the work re- or open the doors, thus endangering
quired. Mercedes-Benz recom- Children in the vehicle themselves and others.
mends a Mercedes-Benz Service Also observe:
If a child is travelling in your vehicle:
Centre for this purpose. In particu-
 secure the child using a child re-  SBC Stop ( page 242)
lar, work relevant to safety or on
straint system which is appropriate  SBC Hold ( page 246)
safety-related systems must be car-
to his/her age and size and which
ried out at a qualified specialist Observe the other warnings in this
has been approved for Mercedes-
workshop. Benz, preferably on a suitable rear Owner's Manual concerning chil-
Comply with safety regulations seat dren in the vehicle.
when disposing of belt tensioners.  make sure that the child is strapped
Details of these regulations are in throughout the trip
available at any Mercedes-Benz Child seats and information about the
Service Centre. correct child restraint system are avail-
able from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.

64 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Occupant safety

Child restraint systems You can recognise child seats in the


"Universal" category from the orange
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
approval label. The label is attached to
only use the child restraint systems list-
the child seat and denotes what type it
ed on page 68.
is.

Risk of injury G
Children under 1.50 m (5 feet) tall or
under 12 years of age cannot wear
P91.00-2150-31
the seat belts properly. They there-
fore need special restraint systems
for protection in an accident.
On no account should children trav-
el sitting on the lap of another occu-
pant. The occupant and the child will Example of a child seat approval
otherwise not be protected in an ac- label
cident and could be seriously or fa-
tally injured.
Follow the manufacturer's installa-
tion instructions when fitting a child
restraint system.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 65


Safety
Occupant safety

Suitable seat positions

Saloon
Weight category and Child seat on the Child seat on left Child seat on centre Child seat on centre
ages front-passenger and right rear seat rear seat without rear seat with
seat through-loading through-loading
feature feature
Category 0: up to As recommended1 Universal Universal As recommended
10 kg
up to approximately
9 months
Category I: 9 to 18 kg Universal2 Universal Universal Universal3
approximately 8
months up to 4 years
Category II/III: Universal2 Universal Universal Universal3
15 kg to 36 kg
approximately 3.5 to
12 years

1 Only use child seats with automatic child seat recognition.


2 If you are using a child seat without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position.
3 Forward-facing child seat in the "Universal" category.
4 Do not use a rearward-facing child seat.

66 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Occupant safety

Estate
Weight category and Child seat on the Child seat on left, Child seat on bench
ages front-passenger right and centre seat
seat rear seat
Category 0: up to As recommended1 Universal Not permissible
10 kg
up to approximately
9 months
Category I: 9 to 18 kg Universal2 Universal As recommended4
approximately 8
months up to 4 years
Category II/III: Universal2 Universal No child seat required
15 kg to 36 kg
approximately 3.5 to
12 years

1 Only use child seats with automatic child seat recognition.


2 If you are using a child seat without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to its
rearmost position.
3 Forward-facing child seat in the "Universal" category.
4 Do not use a rearward-facing child seat.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 67


Safety
Occupant safety

Recommended child restraint


systems

Weight category Manufacturer Type Approval number DaimlerChrysler Automatic child seat
and ages number recognition
Category 0: up to Britax Römer Baby E1 03 301063 B6 6 86 8159 Yes
10 kg Safe
up to approximately
9 months
Category I: 9 to Britax Römer Prince E1 03 301096 B6 6 86 8167 No1
18 kg B6 6 86 8168 Yes
approximately
8 months to 4 years Britax Römer Duo E1 03 301133 B6 6 86 8205 Yes
Category II/III: Britax Römer Zoom E1 03 301061 B6 6 86 8166 No1
15 kg to 36 kg B6 6 86 8176 Yes
approximately 3.5 to
12 years Bingo GmbH Rucky E1 03 301107 B6 6 86 8180 No1

1 If you are using a child seat without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position.

68 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Occupant safety

Risk of injury G For this reason, the instrument pan-


el contains an appropriate warning
Do not place any objects under the
child seat, e.g. a cushion. The entire
On the front-passenger seat, use symbol. support surface of the child seat
only restraint systems that have If you use a forward-facing child seat must be in contact with the vehicle
been recommended for Mercedes- without automatic child seat recog- seat. An incorrectly fitted child seat
Benz and that have automatic child nition on the front-passenger seat, cannot perform its protective func-
seat recognition. You can obtain this you must move the front-passenger tion in the event of an accident, and
information from any Mercedes- seat to its rearmost position. could even lead to injuries.
Benz Service Centre. Never leave children alone in the ve-
If you use a rearward-facing child hicle, even if they are secured in a
seat on the front-passenger seat, it child restraint system. They could
must be a special Mercedes-Benz open the doors or injure themselves P00.00-3273-31
rearward-facing child seat with au- on moving parts in the vehicle.
tomatic child seat recognition.
If you use any other type of rear-
ward-facing child seat on the front-
passenger seat, the front-passenger
airbag will not be deactivated and
the child could be seriously or fatally Rearward-facing child seat warning
injured by the airbag inflating. symbol

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 69


Safety
Occupant safety

Automatic child seat


recognition Risk of injury G  Only use a suitable forward-
facing child seat on the front-
The indicator lamp is located on the passenger seat ( page 66).
centre console. If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
The front-passenger seat must
warning lamp does not light up when be moved to its rearmost posi-
the child seat is fitted, the front-pas- tion.
senger airbag has not been deacti-
Have the automatic child recogni-
vated. This means that a child could
tion checked at a qualified specialist
P68.10-2863-31 sustain life-threatening injuries. In workshop which has the necessary
this case, proceed as follows: specialist knowledge and tools to
 Do not use a rearward-facing carry out the work required.
child seat on the front-passen- Mercedes-Benz recommends a
ger seat. The child may other- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
wise be seriously or fatally this purpose. In particular, work rel-
injured by the airbag inflating. evant to safety or on safety-related
1 Indicator lamp for front-passenger systems must be carried out at a
airbag  Fit a rearward-facing child seat
qualified specialist workshop.
on a rear seat which has been
The front-passenger seat sensor sys- designed for this purpose.
tem automatically detects whether a
special Mercedes-Benz rearward-facing or
child seat with transponder has been
fitted. If this is the case, the PASSEN-
GER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp lights
up on the centre console. The front-pas-
senger airbag is deactivated.

70 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Occupant safety

ISOFIX child seat securing


Have child seat securing systems
system*
and child seats which have been
ISOFIX is a standardised restraint sys- damaged or subjected to a heavy
tem for special child seats on the rear
load in an accident replaced at a
seats. Securing rings are provided for
qualified specialist workshop which
two child seats on the left and right- P 91.12-2356-26
hand seat cushions and on the back- has the necessary specialist knowl-
rest. edge and tools to carry out the work
required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a
Risk of injury G Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for 1 Securing ring
this purpose. In particular, work rel-
The ISOFIX child seat securing sys-
evant to safety or on safety-related
tem is only suitable for children
systems must be carried out at a Risk of injury G
weighing up to 22 kg.
qualified specialist workshop.
Follow the manufacturer's installa- Never leave children unsupervised
tion instructions when fitting the in the vehicle. Keep an eye on chil-
! dren, even if they are secured by a
child seat.
When fitting the child seat, make child restraint system.
An incorrectly fitted child seat could sure that the seat belt for the mid-
come loose and fatally injure the dle seat is not trapped.
child or other vehicle occupants.
When fitting the child seat, make
sure that it is engaged in the secur-
ing rings on both sides.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 71


Safety
Occupant safety

Integrated child seat*


The child seats are integrated on the Risk of injury G Have child seats and padded tables
which have been damaged or sub-
right and left-hand sides of the rear
Follow the manufacturer's installa- jected to a heavy load in an accident
bench seat. They comply with legal re-
tion instructions for fitting the pad- replaced at a qualified specialist
quirements (ECE Directive 44).
ded table and fastening the seat workshop which has the necessary
Mercedes-Benz recommends the inte- specialist knowledge and tools to
grated child seat for children: belt.
carry out the work required.
 from two to twelve years of age Do not carry out any modifications Mercedes-Benz recommends a
on the child seat or padded table.
 weighing between 9 kg and 36 kg Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
For children aged between two and four When a child seat is fitted and occu- this purpose. In particular, work rel-
years or weighing between approxi- pied, only drive the vehicle with the evant to safety or on safety-related
mately 9 kg and 18 kg, you also require head restraint installed and correct- systems must be carried out at a
a padded table which has been special- ly adjusted. This reduces the risk of qualified specialist workshop.
ly approved for the integrated child injury to the child in an accident.
seat.
Children under two years of age re-
quire a different child restraint sys-
tem. Information about other child
restraint systems is available at any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

72 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Occupant safety

Fastening the seat belt Folding in the child seat


Always fasten the seat belt.  Pull seat cushion release handle
 Guide the belt over the lap through 1.
hook 2.  Push the child seat back in the seat
P91.20-2073-31
 Click the belt tongue into the buck-
until it engages.
le.
Rear child-proof locks
If you are using the child seat without
the padded table, make sure that the The child-proof locks on the rear doors
belt: enable you to secure each door individ-
ually. If a door has been secured:
1 Release handle  is routed as low as possible over
2 Hook the child's hip bones  you will not be able to open it from
the inside
 is tightened across the lap by pull-
Folding out the child seat ing the child's shoulder belt up  you will be able to open it from the
 Pull seat cushion release handle
outside, provided the vehicle is not
 is tight and is routed over the mid-
1. locked (the locking knobs in the
dle of the child's shoulder
doors are up)
 Push the child seat upwards and  is not twisted and does not pass
back until it engages. around the child's neck or under
the child's arm

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 73


Safety
Occupant safety

Tailgate child-proof lock (Estate)


Risk of accident G
Do not leave children unsupervised
Risk of accident G
in the vehicle. They could open one
Do not leave children unsupervised
of the front doors, even if it is
in the vehicle. They could otherwise
locked, and thereby endanger them-
P 68.00-2805-31 open the tailgate, even if it is locked,
selves and others.
and thereby endanger themselves
and others.
Unlocking
1 To lock
 Slide the locking lever down 2. The tailgate child-proof lock prevents
2 To unlock
the tailgate from being opened from the
inside.
Locking
 Slide the locking lever up with a
suitable object 1.
 Check that the child-proof locks are
working properly.

74 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Occupant safety

Rear side window child-proof Activating


locks  Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 lights up.
Risk of injury G You can no longer operate the rear
side windows using the buttons in
Always activate the rear side win-
the rear compartment.
dow child-proof locks if children are
P 68.00-3238-31
travelling in the rear of the vehicle. i
Children could otherwise be injured, The rear side windows can be
e.g. by becoming trapped in a win- opened using the driver's door
1 To lock dow as it closes. switch even when they have been
2 To unlock disabled.
The button is located on the driver's
Locking door. Deactivating
 Slide the locking lever to the left  Press button 1.
P 54.25-2580-31
1.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
The tailgate can no longer be
opened from the inside. You can operate the rear side win-
dows from the rear compartment
again.
Unlocking
 Slide the locking lever to the right
2.
The tailgate can be opened from the
inside again.
1 Button
2 Indicator lamp

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 75


Safety
Driving safety systems

In this section, you will find information


ABS
about the following driving safety sys- Risk of accident G ABS adjusts the brake pressure in such
tems:
a way that the wheels do not lock when
 ABS (anti-lock braking system) The risk of an accident increases if you brake. This allows you to continue
 BAS (Brake Assist) you: steering the vehicle when braking.
 ESP (Electronic Stability Program)  drive too fast, particularly when ABS works from a speed of about
cornering and on wet or smooth 5 mph (8 km/h) upwards, regardless of
 SBC brake system (Sensotronic roads road-surface conditions.
Brake Control)
 drive too close to the vehicle in ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
i front when you only brake gently.
In wintry driving conditions, you will The driving safety systems de- The - indicator lamp ( page 20) in
only achieve the maximum effect of scribed in this section are unable to the instrument cluster lights up when
ABS, BAS, ESP and the SBC brake reduce this risk or overcome the you switch on the ignition. It goes out
system if winter tyres (M+S tyres) laws of physics. when the engine is running.
are used, with snow chains if neces-
sary. You should therefore always adapt
your driving style to suit the current Risk of accident G
road and weather conditions and
maintain a sufficient distance from Do not depress the brake pedal sev-
other road users and objects on the eral times in quick succession
road. (pumping). Depress the brake firmly
and evenly. Pumping the brake ped-
al reduces the braking effect.

76 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Driving safety systems

Braking The brakes will function as usual once


If ABS cuts in while you are braking, the Risk of accident G you release the brake pedal. BAS is
then deactivated.
v warning lamp flashes in the in-
strument cluster. You will not feel the You should always adapt your driv-
brake pedal pulsating as this happens. ing style to suit the current road and Risk of accident G
When ABS is operating: weather conditions and maintain a
sufficient distance from other road If BAS has malfunctioned, the brak-
 Continue to depress the brake ped-
users and objects on the road. ing system remains available with
al with force until the braking situa-
tion is over. full brake boosting effect. However,
BAS braking force is not automatically in-
For full braking application:
creased in emergency braking situa-
 Depress the brake pedal with maxi-
BAS operates in emergency braking sit-
uations. If you depress the brake pedal tions and the stopping distance may
mum force. increase.
quickly, BAS automatically boosts the
braking force and thus shortens the
stopping distance.
 Depress the brake pedal firmly until
the emergency situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from lock-
ing.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 77


Safety
Driving safety systems

ESP !
ESP monitors the driving stability and
Risk of accident G Vehicles without 4MATIC:
the traction, i.e. power transmission be- The ignition must be switched off if:
tween the tyres and the road surface. If the v warning lamp flashes in
the instrument cluster, proceed as  the parking brake is being tested
ESP detects when a wheel spins or the using a dynamometer
follows:
vehicle enters a skid. ESP stabilises the
 Under no circumstances should  the vehicle is being towed with
vehicle by braking individual wheels,
you deactivate ESP. the front/rear axle raised
limiting the engine power output, and
assists you when pulling away on a wet  Only depress the accelerator Application of the brakes by ESP
or slippery road surface. ESP also stabi- pedal as far as necessary when would otherwise destroy the braking
lises the vehicle during braking. pulling away. system on the front/rear axle.
When ESP intervenes, the v warn-  Ease off the accelerator pedal Vehicles with 4MATIC:
ing lamp flashes in the instrument clus- when driving.
ter. The v warning lamp in the The ignition must be switched off
instrument cluster lights up when the  You should adapt your driving when the parking brake is tested
ignition is switched on. It goes out when style to suit the current road and with the brake dynamometer.
the engine is running. weather conditions.
Application of the brakes by ESP
Otherwise the vehicle could begin to would otherwise destroy the braking
skid. system on the front/rear axle.
ESP cannot reduce the risk of an ac- A function or performance test
cident if you drive too fast. ESP can- should only be carried out with a
not overcome the laws of physics. twin-axle dynamometer.

78 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Driving safety systems

When you switch off ESP: Deactivating ESP


i
Only use wheels with the recom-  ESP no longer improves driving sta- The button is located on the centre con-
mended tyre sizes ( page 458). bility sole.
Only then will ESP function proper-  the engine's torque is then no long-
ly. er limited and the drive wheels
could spin. This results in a cutting
Activating/deactivating ESP action of the spinning wheels for
better grip P 42.45-3134-31
ESP is activated automatically when the
ignition is switched on.  traction control is still activated
It may be best to deactivate ESP in the  you can still brake with support
following situations: from ESP
 if snow chains are being used
i
 in deep snow If ESP is deactivated and one or 1 To activate/deactivate ESP
 on sand or gravel more wheels are spinning, the v
warning lamp flashes in the instru-  Press button 1.
ment cluster. ESP does not then The v warning lamp in the in-
Risk of accident G stabilise the vehicle. strument cluster lights up.
ESP is deactivated.
Activate ESP as soon as the situa-
tions described above no longer ap-
ply. ESP will otherwise not be able to
stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle
starts to skid or when a wheel is
spinning.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 79


Safety
Driving safety systems

SBC brake system


Risk of accident G The SBC brake system combines a hy-
Risk of accident G
draulic brake system with an electroni-
If the v warning lamp in the in- cally-controlled brake boosting effect. The 3 indicator lamp in the in-
strument cluster lights up continu- This provides increased braking safety strument cluster lights up if there is
ously when the engine is running, and comfort. a malfunction in the SBC brake sys-
ESP is deactivated. The risk of your tem or the brakes. Always follow
SBC has the following convenience fea-
vehicle skidding is then increased in tures in addition to its braking function: the notes in the multi-function dis-
certain situations. play. Refer to the "Practical advice"
 SBC Stop* ( page 242)
You should therefore always adapt section ( page 360) and
 SBC Hold ( page 246) ( page 397) for information on the
your driving style to suit the current
road and weather conditions. types of malfunctions and follow the
procedures described in the event
of a malfunction.
Activating ESP
If the SBC brake system malfunc-
 Press button 1.
tions, Mercedes-Benz recommends
The v warning lamp in the in- that you have the vehicle transport-
strument cluster goes out.
ed on a transporter or trailer. If this
ESP is reactivated. is not possible, a tow bar must be
used. Always comply with the maxi-
mum permissible speed and dis-
tance for towing in your country.

80 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Driving safety systems

 switch on the ignition


Risk of accident G  press the button on the selector le- Risk of injury G
ver once when using KEYLESS GO*
If there are faults in the power sup- If you do not deactivate the SBC
 depress the brake pedal
ply or the vehicle's electrical sys- brake system before carrying out
 release the parking brake
tem, the SBC brake system switches maintenance work – especially the
over to emergency operating mode, i replacement of brake pads – this
since it requires electrical energy. can result in crushing injuries
If you activate the SBC brake system
Greater braking force will then be with the brake pedal, pedal resist- through brake pistons being
required and the braking and stop- ance is reduced and pedal travel is pressed out or may cause acid
ping distance will be increased. If longer the first time you depress the burns from leaking brake fluid since
necessary, depress the brake pedal brake. Pedal travel returns to normal the system builds up high brake
with maximum force. when you release the brake pedal. pressure automatically in order to
You may feel the brake pedal pulsate test the system.
The SBC brake system is automatically when you release it, and hear a The SBC brake system must be de-
activated if you: noise. The noise is produced by the activated before service work is car-
 unlock the vehicle using the key or SBC pump. It will cease after a short ried out on it. You can obtain
the KEYLESS GO* system while.
information on how to deactivate
 open the driver's or front-passen- the SBC brake system at any
ger door Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 81


Safety
Driving safety systems

Tips for driving with SBC  You should brake firmly after driv-
Risk of injury G  You should downshift (1st, 2nd or
ing on a wet or snow-covered road
surface before stopping the engine.
3rd gear) when driving on long and
Mercedes-Benz recommends a The brake discs dry as they are
steep downhill gradients. This pre-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for warmed up, thus preventing corro-
vents the brakes from overheating
sion.
this purpose. In particular, work rel- or wearing too quickly.
evant to safety or on safety-related  For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
 Continue driving for a short time af-
systems must be carried out at a recommends that you only use
ter subjecting the brakes to a heavy
qualified specialist workshop. components, e.g. brake pads,
load. This allows the airflow to cool
which have been specially ap-
the brakes more quickly.
proved by Mercedes-Benz for your
The SBC brake system brake vehicle. Brake pads which have not
boost switches off automatically:
Risk of injury G been approved for Mercedes-Benz
 after approximately 20 seconds, if could affect your vehicle's operat-
you lock the vehicle from the out- Make sure that you do not endanger ing safety.
side other road users when applying the
 after approximately two minutes if brakes.
you turn the key to position 0 or re-
move it from the ignition lock  You should apply the brakes hard
from time to time at a high vehicle
speed if the vehicle's brake system
has not been subjected to high
loads for a long period of time. This
improves the grip of the brake
pads.

82 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Anti-theft systems
 Anti-theft systems
Immobiliser Deactivating the immobiliser Anti-theft alarm system*
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle A visual and audible alarm is triggered if
from being started by an unauthorised With the key the alarm system is primed and you
person.  Switch on the ignition. open:
 a door
Activating the immobiliser With KEYLESS GO*
 the boot lid/tailgate
 Press the KEYLESS GO button twice
With the key  the bonnet
without depressing the brake.
 Remove the key from the ignition
i An emergency call is also initiated if:
lock.
The immobiliser is always deacti-  you unlock the vehicle using the
vated when you start the engine. emergency key element
With KEYLESS GO*
 a window is smashed
 Press the KEYLESS GO button on
the selector lever. i
The engine switches off. The alarm is not switched off if you
close an open door again.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 83


Safety
Anti-theft systems

Priming the alarm system  Press the KEYLESS GO button on


i
the selector lever.
The indicator lamp is on the centre con- The alarm system will be triggered if
sole in the central locking button. you unlock and open your vehicle The key must be inside the vehicle.
with the emergency key. The alarm switches off.

Switching off the alarm Tow-away protection*


An alarm sounds if your vehicle's angle
With the key of inclination is altered while tow-away
E2_F1 protection is primed.
 Insert the key in the ignition lock.
B6_P54.25-3155-31
or i
 Press the Œ or ‹ button. The tow-away protection alarm is
triggered if the vehicle is jacked up
The alarm switches off. on one side, for example.
1 Indicator lamp
With KEYLESS GO* Priming tow-away protection
 Lock your vehicle.
 Pull the outside door handle.
The alarm system is primed after  Lock your vehicle.
approximately 30 seconds. Indica- The key must be outside the vehi- Tow-away protection is primed af-
tor lamp 1 flashes. cle. ter approximately 30 seconds.
or
Deactivating the alarm system
 Unlock your vehicle.

84 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Safety
Anti-theft systems

Deactivating tow-away i Interior motion sensor*


protection You can only deactivate tow-away A visual and audible alarm is triggered if
Deactivate tow-away protection if your protection if the ignition is switched you vehicle is locked and:
vehicle: off.
 someone breaks a side window and
 is being transported reaches into the vehicle
 Turn the key to position 0 or 1 in
 is to be carried on another vehicle the ignition lock, or remove it.  someone reaches into the vehicle
(e.g. ferry, vehicle carrier) interior through the open sliding/
 Press button 1.
This will prevent false alarms. tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding
The indicator lamp in the button sunroof* or an open side window
The button is located on the overhead lights up briefly.
control panel. The button is on the overhead control
Tow-away protection is deactivat- panel.
ed.
 Lock your vehicle.
P 54.25-2533-31
i
Tow-away protection is automati-
cally deactivated when you unlock
your vehicle.
P 54.25-2613-31
Tow-away protection remains deac-
tivated until you lock the vehicle
again.
1 To deactivate tow-away protection
1 To deactivate the interior motion
sensor

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 85


Safety
Anti-theft systems

Priming the interior motion Deactivating the interior motion


sensor sensor Risk of injury G
 Close the side windows and the Deactivate the interior motion sensor if
sliding/tilting sunroof*/panorama people or animals are to remain in the Do not leave children unsupervised
sliding sunroof*. locked vehicle. This will prevent false in the vehicle. They could open the
alarms. doors, release the parking brake or
This will prevent false alarms.
 Switch off the ignition or remove injure themselves on moving parts,
 Lock your vehicle.
the key ( page 31). thus endangering themselves and
The interior motion sensor is others.
primed after approximately  Press button 1.
30 seconds. The indicator lamp in the button
flashes briefly. i
i The interior motion sensor remains
Do not leave anything, e.g. mas- deactivated until you lock the vehi-
cots, hanging on the rear-view mir- cle again.
ror or on the grab handles on the
roof lining. These could otherwise
trigger false alarms.

86 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

You will find detailed information about The remote control locks and unlocks
the vehicle's functions in the "Controls the following centrally:
in detail" section. You will find this sec-  the doors
tion most useful if you are already famil- P80.35-2083-31
iar with the basic functions of the  the boot lid/tailgate
vehicle.  the fuel filler flap
If you are not yet familiar with the basic
functions, the "Getting started" section
will provide you with more information.
Risk of accident G
You will find the reference to the appro-
Never leave children unsupervised
priate page number at the start of each
in the vehicle. They could open a Key
section.
locked door from the inside or start
1 Battery check lamp
Key with remote control the vehicle if the key is left in it and
2 ‹ Locking button
The vehicle's equipment includes two thereby endanger themselves and 3 Š Boot/luggage compartment
keys with remote control. Emergency others. You should therefore take unlocking button
key element release catches 4 have the key with you when leaving the 4 Release catch for
different colours to help distinguish be- vehicle, even if you are only leaving emergency key element
tween the two keys. it for a short while. 5 ΠUnlocking button
The remote control allows you to lock
and unlock the vehicle from some dis-
!
tance. Only use the remote control in Do not expose the key to high levels
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle to of electromagnetic radiation. It may
prevent theft. otherwise no longer function cor-
rectly.

88 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

If you do not open either a door or the Locking the vehicle from the
i
boot/luggage compartment after you boot/luggage compartment*
You can also open and close the have unlocked the vehicle, it will relock
sliding/tilting sunroof*/panorama You can lock vehicles with boot lid/
itself after approximately 40 seconds.
sliding sunroof* and the side win- tailgate remote control* and KEYLESS
dows with the remote control GO* centrally using a switch in the boot
Locking the vehicle centrally
( page 221). lid/tailgate.
 Press the ‹ button.
When you unlock the vehicle, the
SBC brake system is activated. The turn signals flash three times if
the doors and boot/luggage com- E2_F1
In an emergency, you can also open
partment are closed. The anti-theft B6+7_P72.20-2357-31
the driver's door manually with the
alarm system* is primed and the
key ( page 402).
active drive authorisation system is
activated.
Factory settings

Unlocking the vehicle centrally


 Press the Πbutton.
Saloon
The turn signals flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors pop up. 1 Central locking button
The anti-theft alarm system* is de-
activated.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 89


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Individual settings Unlocking the vehicle centrally


P 72.20-2217-31
If you frequently drive alone, you may  Press the Πbutton twice.
wish to change the function of the re- The turn signals flash once. The
mote control. Pressing the Πbutton locking knobs in the doors pop up.
will then only unlock the driver's door The anti-theft alarm system* is de-
and the fuel filler flap. activated.
 Press the Œ and ‹ buttons
simultaneously for about six sec- Locking the vehicle centrally
onds until battery check lamp 1
 Press the ‹ button.
flashes twice.
Estate The turn signals flash three times if
The remote control will then function as the doors and boot/luggage com-
1 Central locking button follows: partment are closed. The anti-theft
 Press switch 1. alarm system* is primed and the
Unlocking the driver's door active drive authorisation system is
The boot lid/tailgate closes auto-
activated.
matically.  Press the Πbutton once.
The vehicle locks centrally. The turn signals flash once. The
locking knob in the door pops up.
Risk of injury G The anti-theft alarm system* is de-
activated.

Monitor the closing procedure to


make sure that nobody can become
trapped.

90 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Restoring the factory settings KEYLESS GO key*


 Press the Œ and ‹ buttons The items of optional equipment which
Risk of accident G
simultaneously for about six sec- can be supplied with your vehicle in-
onds until battery check lamp 1 clude two KEYLESS GO keys. Never leave children unsupervised
flashes twice. in the vehicle. They could open a
When you pull the door handle or pull
locked door from the inside or start
on the boot lid/tailgate, your vehicle
Checking the battery the vehicle with a valid KEYLESS GO
checks the validity of the KEYLESS GO
 Press the Œ or ‹ button. key. key left in the vehicle or by pressing
the KEYLESS GO button on the se-
The batteries in the remote control If it is the correct KEYLESS GO key, your
lector lever and could thereby en-
are OK if battery check lamp 1 vehicle unlocks the following centrally if
danger themselves and others.
lights up briefly. If it does not light it is still set to the factory setting
up, replace the batteries immedi- ( page 93): Switch off the engine and take the
ately ( page 408). KEYLESS GO key with you, even if
 the doors
you are only leaving for a short
 the boot/luggage compartment while.
 the fuel filler flap

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 91


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

! Points to remember  To be able to start the engine with


the KEYLESS GO button on the se-
Do not expose the KEYLESS GO key  Always carry the KEYLESS GO key
lector lever:
to high levels of electromagnetic ra- on your person.
diation. It may otherwise no longer  Never store the KEYLESS GO key  the KEYLESS GO key must be in
function correctly. the vehicle
together with:
 all the doors must be closed
 electronic equipment such as a
i mobile phone or another  the selector lever must be at P
You can also treat the KEYLESS GO KEYLESS GO key or N
key in the same way as a normal  metallic objects such as coins  the brake pedal must be ap-
key with remote control or foil plied
( page 88).
This could impair its effectiveness.  If the engine has been started using
You can also close the sliding/ tilt- the KEYLESS GO button on the se-
ing sunroof*/panorama sliding  To lock or unlock the vehicle from
lector lever, you can switch off the
sunroof* and the side windows si- the outside using the KEYLESS GO
engine using:
multaneously using the locking but- key, the key must be no more than
a metre away from the door or  the KEYLESS GO button on the
ton on the door handle
boot/luggage compartment. selector lever
( page 221).
 the key, if you move the selec-
When you unlock the vehicle, the
tor lever to P
SBC brake system is activated.
or

92 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

if the selector lever is still at P  If the KEYLESS GO key is in the Locking the vehicle centrally
after the engine is started and vehicle, the vehicle can be started
 Press the locking button on the
you insert the key in the ignition at any time. If you have left the
door handle ( page 55) or on the
lock. The inserted key then has KEYLESS GO key in the vehicle, you
boot/luggage compartment
priority over the KEYLESS GO will see the following message in
( page 94).
function and the vehicle's elec- the multi-function display when you
trical system will be set in ac- lock the vehicle: Key still in The turn signals flash three times if
cordance with the key position vehicle!. the doors and boot/luggage com-
in the ignition lock. partment are closed. The anti-theft
Factory settings alarm system* is primed and the
 If the KEYLESS GO key is removed
active drive authorisation system is
from the vehicle (in luggage or an
activated.
article of clothing, for instance), it Unlocking the vehicle centrally
will no longer be possible to lock or  Pull the door handle. i
start the vehicle.
The turn signals flash once. The If the vehicle was centrally locked
 If the KEYLESS GO key is removed locking knobs in the doors pop up. before opening the boot/luggage
from the vehicle while the ignition is The anti-theft alarm system* is de- compartment, you only need to
on and a door is open, i.e. if a pas- activated. close the boot lid/tailgate again. It
senger leaves the vehicle with the will then be locked automatically.
KEYLESS GO key, the following i If you have left the KEYLESS GO key
message will appear in the multi-
The vehicle may accidentally unlock in the vehicle, the boot will not
function display as you pull away:
if the KEYLESS GO key is within one close.
Key not recognised!
metre of the vehicle and:
 a gush of water splashes
against the door handle
 or you clean the door handle

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 93


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Locking the vehicle centrally Individual setting


from the boot If you frequently drive alone, you may
wish to change the function of the
E2_F1 KEYLESS GO key. In this setting, only
B6+4_P80.20-2581-31 the following unlock when you pull the
door handle on the driver's side:
 the driver's door
 the fuel filler flap
E2_F1
B6+3_P80.20-2580-31 Estate
1 Locking button
Saloon  Press locking button 1 on the boot
E2_F1
1 Locking button lid/tailgate.
B6+9_P80.35-2175-31
The vehicle is locked centrally.
The locking knobs in the doors drop
down. The turn signals flash three
times. The anti-theft alarm system*
is primed. 1 Battery check lamp
2 ‹ Locking button
3 ΠUnlocking button

94 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

 Press the Œ and ‹ buttons Restoring the factory settings i


simultaneously for about six sec-
 Press the Œ and ‹ buttons You can only open a locked rear
onds until battery check lamp 1
simultaneously for about six sec- door from the inside if the child-
flashes twice.
onds until battery check lamp 1 proof locks have not been activat-
flashes twice. ed.
The KEYLESS GO key will then function
as follows:
Checking the batteries
P 72.10-2361-31
Unlocking the driver's door  Press the Œ or ‹ button.

 Pull the door handle on the driver's The batteries in the KEYLESS GO
door. key are OK if battery check lamp 1
lights up briefly. If it does not light
Unlocking the vehicle centrally up, replace the batteries immedi-
ately ( page 408).
 Pull the handle of a door other than
the driver's door. Opening the doors from the
inside
Locking the vehicle centrally You can open a door from the inside at 1 Locking knob
 Press the locking button on the any time, even if it has been locked. 2 Inside door handle
door handle ( page 55) or on the  Pull door handle 2.
boot/luggage compartment
( page 94). Locking knob 1 pops up.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 95


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

 Press the Πbutton on the re- The handle is located in the recess for
Opening the boot lid/tailgate
mote control. the rear licence plate.
Opening from the outside The vehicle is unlocked centrally.
The boot/luggage compartment
You can unlock the boot/luggage com-
can be opened manually. E2_F1
partment with the remote control so
that it can then be opened manually. or
B6+1_P80.20-2578-31
 Press the Š button on the re-
Risk of poisoning G mote control.
The boot/luggage compartment is
Make sure that the tailgate is always unlocked.
closed when the engine is running.
Otherwise exhaust fumes could get
i
into the vehicle interior and poison If the vehicle was previously locked Illustration shows Saloon
centrally, it is only necessary to
you.
close the boot lid/tailgate again. It
will then be locked automatically.
!
The boot lid/tailgate swings up-
wards and out. Therefore, make
sure that there is sufficient clear-
ance above the boot lid/tailgate.

96 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Halting the tailgate* opening Opening and halting the tailgate


procedure (Estate)  Open the tailgate.
You can halt the tailgate opening proce-  Let the tailgate swing upwards and
E2_F1 dure anywhere in the last third of the stop it at the required opening posi-
opening angle range. tion between end position 1 and
B6+2_P80.20-2579-31 .
lowest opening position 2.
The tailgate is now halted in this po-
sition.
P72.20-2219-31
Releasing the tailgate lock
Illustration shows Estate
 Push the tailgate gently down-
 Pull the handle and lift the boot lid/ wards.
tailgate.
The tailgate is disengaged from the
! hold position and can be opened
Do not place the remote control in fully.
1 Tailgate end position
the open boot/luggage compart-
2 Lowest opening position
ment. Otherwise there is a risk of be-
ing locked out.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 97


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Opening automatically from the Limiting the boot lid/tailgate


Risk of injury G outside (Saloon) opening angle*
You can unlock and open the boot si- You can limit the boot lid/tailgate
After loading the vehicle, make sure multaneously with the remote control. opening angle on vehicles with a re-
that the tailgate is not in the halt po- mote control switch*. The boot lid/
sition. Secure the load and close the ! tailgate will then only open level with
tailgate completely before every The boot lid automatically swings the roof. This could be useful, for exam-
journey. Otherwise the load could upwards. Make sure therefore that ple, if there is insufficient clearance
fall out of the vehicle and you could there is sufficient clearance above above the boot lid/tailgate.
thereby cause an accident. A load the boot.  Switch the opening limiter on or off
which has not been secured could using the operating system
injure a vehicle occupant in the i ( page 153).
event of sharp braking, e.g. in the You can only open the boot when
event of an accident. the vehicle is stationary.

 Press and hold the Š button on


i
the remote control until the boot lid
Closing the tailgate from the hold
opens.
position overrides the lock setting.
It will open the next time in the usu- i
al way.
It is possible to limit the opening an-
gle on vehicles with boot remote
control* ( page 153).

98 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Opening automatically from the Boot lid remote unlocking feature Boot lid remote control*
inside (Saloon) The boot lid remote opening switch is The boot lid remote opening switch is
You can unlock and open the boot si- located in the driver's door. located in the driver's door.
multaneously from the driver's area.

!
The boot lid automatically swings
upwards. Therefore, make sure that P 54.25-2581-31 P 54.25-2582-31
there is sufficient clearance above
the boot.

1 Remote opening switch 1 Remote opening switch


 Pull remote opening switch 1 until  Pull remote opening switch 1 until
the boot lid opens. the boot lid opens.
The indicator lamp in the switch The indicator lamp in the switch
lights up. It remains lit until you lights up. It remains lit until you
close the boot lid again. close the boot lid again.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 99


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

i  To unlock the tailgate, pull on the


!
upper section of latch 1 and swing
To stop the opening procedure, pull The tailgate swings upwards. There-
the tailgate upwards.
or press the remote opening switch. fore, make sure that there is suffi-
You can limit the opening angle via cient clearance above the luggage i
the operating system ( page 153). compartment. You can prevent the door from be-
ing opened by sliding the safety bolt
Opening from the inside (Estate) i in the latch to the left.
You can only open the tailgate if it is
Risk of poisoning G unlocked. Automatically from the driver's
door*
Make sure that the tailgate is always Manually on the tailgate You can unlock and open the tailgate si-
closed when the engine is running. The latch is on the inside of the tailgate. multaneously from the driver's area.
Otherwise exhaust fumes could get
into the vehicle interior and poison
you.
Do not leave children alone in the P54.25-3325-31
P72.20-2220-31
vehicle. They could open the tailgate
from the inside and thereby endan-
ger themselves and others.

1 Latch 1 Remote opening switch*

100 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

 Pull remote opening switch* 1 and


Closing the boot lid/tailgate
hold it until:
 the tailgate is fully open (final Closing automatically from the
stop) inside* (Saloon) P 54.25-2582-31
or
 the tailgate has reached the de- Risk of injury G
sired opening angle
As soon as you release the remote Monitor the boot lid closing proce-
opening switch*, the tailgate stops. dure to make sure that nobody can
The indicator lamp in the switch become trapped. Release the boot
1 Remote closing switch*
lights up. It remains lit until you lid remote closing switch to stop the
close the tailgate again. closing procedure.  Press and hold remote closing
switch* 1 until the indicator lamp
i in the switch goes out and the boot
The boot lid remote closing switch is lo- lid is closed.
You can limit the opening angle via
cated in the driver's door.
the operating system ( page 153).
i
If the boot lid meets resistance
while closing, e.g. luggage which is
piled too high, the closing proce-
dure is interrupted and the boot lid
re-opens.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 101


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

Closing manually from the Closing manually from the


inside, vehicles with folding outside
bench seat* (Estate)
Risk of injury G P 72.20-2173

Make sure that nobody can be


trapped as you close the boot lid/
E2_F1
tailgate.
B6+5_P72.20-2355-31

i Saloon
Do not leave the key in the boot.
1 Recess
Otherwise you could lock yourself
out.
1 Strap
 Use strap 1 to pull down the tail-
gate firmly from the inside.

P72.20-2215-31

Estate
1 Recess

102 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

 Pull the boot lid/tailgate down


i
firmly by recess 1.
Do not leave the key in the boot.
 If necessary, push the boot lid/ Otherwise you could lock yourself
tailgate shut from the outside, out.
pressing down on the edges. P72.20-2216-31

Closing automatically from the


outside*
E2_F1
Risk of injury G B6+6_P72.20-2356-31
Estate
Monitor the boot lid/tailgate clos- 1 Tailgate closing switch
ing procedure to make sure that no-
 Press closing switch 1 briefly.
body can become trapped. Press
the closing switch on the boot lid/ The boot lid/tailgate closes auto-
matically.
tailgate or press the Š button on Saloon
the remote control to halt the clos-
1 Boot lid closing switch
ing procedure.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 103


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

i Automatic locking Locking and unlocking the


If a KEYLESS GO key* has been left The vehicle will lock itself once you vehicle from the inside
in the vehicle, the tailgate will not have pulled away. You can lock or unlock the vehicle cen-
close. You can open a door from the inside at trally from the inside using the central
If the boot lid/tailgate touches an any time, even if it has been locked. locking button. This feature may be use-
object in its upper range of move- ful if, for example, you wish to unlock
ment, e.g. luggage which is piled i the front-passenger door from the in-
too high, the closing procedure is The doors unlock automatically in side or lock the vehicle before you pull
interrupted and the boot lid/ tail- the event of an accident if the force away.
gate re-opens. of the impact exceeds a predeter-
mined level.
i The vehicle is locked automatically
Risk of accident G
Estate: when the ignition is switched on and
the vehicle is moving. Do not leave children alone in the
The tailgate cannot be closed if the vehicle. They could open a door
automatically extending luggage from the inside – even if it is locked
You may switch off the automatic lock-
compartment floor* has not been – and thereby endanger themselves
ing function via the operating system
fully retracted and the locking
( page 152). or others.
switch flashes.
 Retract the automatically ex-
tending luggage compartment
floor completely ( page 280).

104 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Opening and closing

i The central locking button is located on Locking


the centre console.
You can open a door from the inside  Press upper section 1 of the cen-
at any time, even if it has been tral locking button.
locked. P 54-25-3306-31 The vehicle locks if all the doors are
You can only open a locked rear closed.
door from the inside if it has not
been locked by the child-proof locks. Unlocking
If you have locked the vehicle with  Press lower section 2 of the cen-
the remote control or the KEYLESS tral locking button.
GO* key, you cannot unlock it cen-
The vehicle unlocks.
trally from the inside.

1 To lock
2 To unlock

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 105


Controls in detail
Seats

You will find information about adjust- You can make the settings for the easy- i
ing the seats in the "Getting started" entry/exit feature via the operating
Press one of the following switches
section ( page 34). system ( page 154).
to halt the procedure:
You will find information about folding The easy-exit feature is activated when
 the seat adjustment switch
down the rear bench seat in the follow- you:
( page 36)
ing sections:  switch off the ignition and open the
 the steering column switch
 "Through-loading feature" in the driver's door
( page 39)
Saloon ( page 264). or
 the memory switch
 "Luggage compartment enlarge-  remove the key from the ignition ( page 119)
ment" in the Estate ( page 268) lock
Easy-entry/exit feature* Depending on the settings, either the The steering wheel and seat positions
steering wheel alone swings upwards are stored:

G
(factory setting) or the driver's seat  when you switch off the ignition
Risk of injury moves back and the steering wheel
 when a memory position is stored
swings upwards.
Make sure that nobody can be
The driver's seat and/or the steering
trapped when you activate the easy-
wheel, depending on the settings, are
entry feature.
moved automatically to the position
Never leave children unsupervised previously set as soon as the key is in-
in the vehicle. They could open the serted in the ignition lock with the driv-
driver's door and thereby uninten- er's door closed.
tionally activate the easy-entry fea-
ture.

106 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Seats

Lumbar support Multi-contour seat*


The lumbar support for the front seats You can set the contour of the seat so
can be adjusted to provide optimum as to provide optimum support for your
support for your back. back. P 91.25-2136-31

P 91.10-2622-31

E2_F1
B6+8_P91.25-2252-31
Multi-contour seat controls on vehi-
cles with an electrically adjustable
front seat
1 Seat cushion length
1 Thumbwheel Multi-contour seat controls on vehi- 2 Lumbar region support
3 Upper back support
 Turn thumbwheel 1 until the lum- cles with a manually adjustable
4 Backrest side cushions
bar support is in the required posi- front seat
tion.  Make sure that the ignition is
1 Seat cushion length switched on.
2 Lumbar region support
3 Upper back support
4 Backrest side cushions

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 107


Controls in detail
Seats

Adjusting the contour of the Dynamic driving seat*


backrest
The dynamic driving seat automatically P 54.30-6811-31
 Adjust the seat cushion length to adapts the sides of the backrest to your
the length of your thighs using current driving style.
switch 1.
The dynamic driving seat electronically
 Adjust the contour of the backrest controls the pressure in the air cham-
to the required position for your bers in the side cushions of the back-
back by pressing the æ or ç rest. This function increases ride
button. comfort and driving pleasure.
 Press button 2 to move the point P 91.25-2148-31
of greatest backrest curvature
i
downwards to the lumbar region You can set the characteristics of
and press button 3 to move it up- the dynamic driving seat via the op-
wards to the upper back region. erating system ( page 156).
 Adjust the side cushions of the
Activating
backrest using button 4 so that
you have good lateral support.  Press button 5.
1 Seat cushion length
The indicator lamp in the button 2 Lumbar region support
comes on and the following display 3 Upper back support
appears in the multi-function dis- 4 Backrest side cushions
play for five seconds. 5 To activate the dynamic driving
function
6 Massage function

108 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Seats

Deactivating Fitting and removing the front Removing the head restraints
 Press switch 5 again. head restraints  Pull up the head restraint as far as
The indicator lamp in the button it will go.
goes out. Risk of injury G  Press release 1.
 Pull out the head restraint.
Massage function (PULSE) Occupants should only travel in
The massage function helps you to pre- seats which have the head re- Installing the head restraints
vent muscle tension on long journeys. straints installed.
 Insert the head restraint so that the
 Press button 6. notches on the bar are on the left
Manually adjustable front seat when viewed in the direction of
The indicator lamp in button 6
comes on. The air cushions in the travel.
lumbar region vibrate.  Push the head restraint down until
you hear it click it into place.
i P 91.16-2121-31
The massage function switches off
automatically after approximately
five minutes.

1 Release

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 109


Controls in detail
Seats

Electrically adjustable front seat* Installing the head restraints  Switch on the ignition.
The switch is located on the door control  Insert the head restraint so that the  Press button 1.
panel. notches on the bar are on the left The rear seat head restraints are fold-
when viewed in the direction of travel. ed back.
 Slide switch 1 upwards and hold it
for approximately five seconds. Folding up the head restraints
P91.16-2122-31  Push the head restraint down until
you hear it click it into place.

Rear head restraints

Folding back the rear head


P 91.12-2120-31
restraints
The button is located on the centre con-
sole.
1 Head restraint height adjustment
switch

Removing the head restraints P 54.25-3156-31  Push the head restraints upwards by
 Slide switch 1 upwards until the hand until they engage.
head restraint is fully extended.
 Pull out the head restraint.
Risk of injury G
Occupants should only travel in seats
which have the head restraints in the
upright position.
1 To fold back the rear seat head re-
straints

110 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Seats

Adjusting the head restraint an- Adjusting the head restraint Lowering the head restraint
gle (Estate) height (Estate)  Press release 1 and adjust the
You can engage the two outer head re- head restraint to the required posi-
straints in two positions. tion.

i
Make sure that the head restraint
P 91.16-2183-31
touches the back of your head at
about eye level.
P 91.16-2182-31
Removing the head restraints*
(Saloon)

1 Release
You can adjust the height of the two
1 Button outer head restraints.
 Press button 1. P 91.12-2337-31
Raising the head restraint
 Adjust the head restraints to the re-
quired position.  Pull the head restraint up to the re-
quired position.

i
You must push release 1 once the
head restraint is fully inserted. 1 Release

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 111


Controls in detail
Seats

 Fold the backrest forward Removing the head restraint i


( page 264). (Estate) You must pull the outer head re-
 Fold the head restraint forward. straints firmly upwards to remove
 Press head restraint releases 1 them.
and pull the head restraint out of When refitting the head restraints,
the guides. make sure that:
P 91.16-2184-31
 Fold the backrest back to its origi-  you place the correct head re-
nal position. straint on the middle seat. It is
marked with the letter "M" on
i the outsides of the securing
When refitting the head restraints, ring.
make sure that:
 the head restraints engage ful-
 you place the correct head re- 1 Release ly.
straint on the middle seat. It is
 Press head restraint release 1 and
marked with the letter "M" on
pull the head restraint out of the
the outsides of the securing
guides.
ring.
 the head restraints engage fully.

112 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Seats

Folding bench seat in the


luggage compartment* Risk of injury G Risk of injury G
(Estate)
If you are using the folding bench Only replace damaged covers with
i seat in the luggage compartment, genuine Mercedes-Benz covers.
The folding bench seat in the lug- the backrests on the rear bench Never leave children unsupervised
gage compartment* is only suitable seat must be upright and locked. in the vehicle. This applies even if
for persons no more than 1.40 m
Only start the journey once the head they are secured by a child restraint
(4' 7") tall and weighing a maximum
of 50 kg. restraint for the folding bench seat system.
is correctly positioned. Adjust the Make sure that luggage and other
Secure children as recommended
head restraint so that the back of items are sufficiently secured.
( page 64).
the seat occupant's head is support-
The combined luggage cover and ed at about eye level. This reduces People could otherwise be injured
net must be fitted if you are using the risk of injury to the child in an ac- as a result of the load being thrown
the folding bench seat. around in the event of sharp brak-
cident.
ing, a sudden change in direction or
Make sure that the seat belt is cor- an accident.
rectly routed across the body and
that the seat belt tongue is engaged
in the buckle.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 113


Controls in detail
Seats

Folding out the folding bench i  Hook the seat belt into retainers
seat 3.
You can move the rear bench seat
backrest to a more upright position  Pull release handle 2 and fold the
in order to sit more comfortably on folding bench seat cushion into the
the folding bench seat sitting position.
( page 271).  Press the seat cushion fully down.
P91.22-2105-31 This ensures the backrest engages
 Pull release handle 1 and fold the
properly.
folding bench seat backrest up-
wards.  Fold the head restraints upwards.

Fitting/removing the seat


cushion
1 Backrest release handle
2 Seat cushion release handle i
P91.22-2106-31 You must remove the seat cushion
Before folding out the bench seat you
must: if you wish to raise the luggage
compartment floor, e.g. if the vehi-
 move the rear bench seat backrests
cle has a flat tyre.
to the upright position and secure
them
 move the handle for the combined 3 Seat belt retainers
luggage cover and net upwards

114 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Seats

Removing Fitting Folding back the folding bench


seat

P91.22-2113-31 P91.22-2112-31
P91.22-2102-31

1 Seat guides  Guide seat cushion 2 at a slight


2 Seat cushion angle from the rear 3 into seat 1 Tab
guides 1. 2 Backrest
 Fold seat cushion 2 upwards and
remove it from seat guides 1.  Fold seat cushion 2 back to its  Use tab 1 to pull the seat cushion
original position until it engages 4. upwards and fold it back to its orig-
inal position until it engages.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 115


Controls in detail
Seats

Seat ventilation*
The buttons are located on the upper
section of the centre console. The blue
indicator lamps on the buttons indicate
P91.22-2100-31 P91.22-2116-31 the ventilation level you have selected.

P54.25-3157-31

1 Release button on the bottom of 1 Release


the head restraint 2 Backrest
 Push release button 1 and fold the  Press on release 1 and push the
head restraints down. head restraints in fully.
 Fold folding bench seat backrest 2
!
back until it engages in its original 1 Seat ventilation
To prevent damage, you must insert
position.
the head restraints fully into their
guides and engage the belt buckles
in their guides.

116 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Seats

Level i
3 Three indicator lamps are lit When you open the side windows
and the sliding/tilting sunroof*/ P 54.25-3158-31
2 Two indicator lamps are lit panorama sliding sunroof* using
1 One indicator lamp is lit the remote control ( page 221),
the driver's seat ventilation auto-
Off No indicator lamps are lit
matically switches to the highest
level.
!
If the battery voltage is too low, the Switching off the seat ventila-
seat ventilation may switch off. One tion 1 Front seat heating
or more indicator lamps will flash.
 Press button 1 repeatedly until all
the indicator lamps go out.
 Make sure that the ignition is
switched on. In normal mode, the seat ventilation
switches off after approximately P 54.25-2666-31
All the lights in the instrument clus-
30 minutes.
ter are lit.
Seat heating*
Switching on the seat ventilation The buttons for the front seats are lo-
 Press button 1 repeatedly until cated on the centre console. The but-
the required ventilation level is set. tons for the rear seats are located on
the rear doors.
1 Rear seat heating
The red indicator lamps in the switch in-
dicate the heating level you have select-
ed.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 117


Controls in detail
Seats

Switching on the seat heating Switching off the seat heating


Level
 Press button 1 repeatedly until  Press button 1 repeatedly until all
3 Three indicator lamps are lit
the required heating level is set. the indicator lamps go out.
The system switches back to
level 2 automatically after i
approximately 5 minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the
2 Two indicator lamps are lit seat heating may switch off. One or
The system switches back to more indicator lamps will flash.
level 1 automatically after ap-
proximately 10 minutes.
1 One indicator lamp is lit
The seat heating switches off
automatically after about
20 minutes.
Off No indicator lamps are lit

 Make sure that the ignition is


switched on.

118 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Storing settings*
 Storing settings*
You can store up to three different set- The memory button is on the door.  Then press storage position 1, 2 or
tings for each key using the memory 3 within three seconds.
switch. All the settings are stored in this
Each seat and backrest position is storage position.
stored as a single memory preset. On P 54.25-2583-31
vehicles with the dynamic driving seat*, Calling up a stored setting
activation/deactivation of the dynamic
driving seat* can also be stored here. Risk of accident G
The steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings are also stored on the driver's Only call up the memory function
side. when the vehicle is stationary. You
Key-dependent storage can be M Memory button will otherwise be distracted and
switched off via the operating system could lose control of the vehicle as a
1, 2, 3 Storage position
( page 155). result of a seat movement.
 Make sure that the ignition is
switched on.
 Press and hold storage position 1, 2
All the lights in the instrument clus- or 3 until the seat, steering wheel
ter are lit. and mirrors have moved to the
stored position.
Storing
 Adjust the seats, the steering wheel
and the mirrors ( page 34).
 Press the M memory button.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 119


Controls in detail
Storing settings*

i The buttons and the memory switch are  Engage reverse gear.
located on the driver's door. The passenger-side exterior mirror
The setting procedure is interrupted
as soon as you release the position turns downwards.
button.  Adjust the exterior mirror by press-
ing button 3 so that you can see
P 54.25-2584-31
Storing a parking position* the rear wheel and the kerb.
To make it easier to park, you can store  Press the M memory button on the
the passenger-side exterior mirror posi- memory switch.
tion in such a way that you can see the  Then press adjustment button 3
rear wheel on that side as soon as you within three seconds.
engage reverse gear. To do this, you
The parking position is stored if the
must activate the parking position func-
mirror does not move.
tion in the operating system 1 Left-hand exterior mirror
( page 155). 2 Right-hand exterior mirror i
You can store one parking position for 3 Adjustment button
If the mirror does move, repeat the
the passenger-side exterior mirror per 4 Memory button
steps. You can move the mirror
key by pressing the memory switch.  Make sure that the vehicle is sta- again after storing the setting.
You will find information about using tionary and the ignition is switched
the parking position in the "Good visibil- on.
ity" section ( page 177).
All the lights in the instrument clus-
ter are lit.
 Press button 2.
The passenger-side exterior mirror
is selected.

120 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Lighting
 Lighting
You will find information about switch- i Light switch
ing on the lights and indicating a turn in
If you drive in countries in which The light switch is located in the cockpit
the "Getting started" section
traffic drives on the opposite side of between the steering wheel and the
( page 49).
the road to the country where the driver's door.
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz vehicle is registered, oncoming traf-
recommends that you drive with the fic may be dazzled by the asymmet-
lights switched on even during the day- rical dipped-beam headlamps. Have
time. In some countries, deviations the headlamps changed to symmet- E2_F1
from these instructions are possible rical dipped-beam when driving in
due to legal requirements and self-im- these countries. You can obtain in- B7_P54.25-3602-31
posed obligations. In these countries, formation about this from any
the dipped-beam headlamps are Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
switched on when the ignition is
switched on. In countries in which con-
stant headlamp mode is not a legal re-
quirement, you can change this setting
M Lights off/constant headlamp
via the operating system ( page 149).
mode
U Headlamps controlled automat-
ically
C Side lamps, licence plate and
instrument lighting on
B Dipped-beam headlamps or
main-beam headlamps on
ˆ Right-hand parking lamp on
‚ Left-hand parking lamp on

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 121


Controls in detail
Lighting

i Automatic headlamp mode


When it is dark, only turn the light
A warning sounds if you remove the The side lamps, dipped-beam head- switch from U to B while the
key from the ignition lock and open lamps and licence plate illumination are
vehicle is stationary. You could oth-
the driver's door while the side switched on automatically, depending
erwise cause an accident while
lamps or dipped-beam headlamps on the brightness of the ambient light.
headlamp mode is temporarily inter-
are switched on.
rupted.
The Switch off lights! message Risk of accident G Automatic headlamp mode is only
appears in the multi-function dis-
play. an aid to help you drive the vehicle.
If the light switch is at position
You are responsible for the vehicle's
U:
Constant headlamp mode lighting at all times.
 the headlamps could be tempo-
You can set constant headlamp mode rarily interrupted by strong glare
via the operating system ( page 149). (e.g. from oncoming traffic).  Turn the light switch to U.
This does not apply in countries in
 the lights do not switch on auto- The side lamps are switched on and
which there is a legal requirement to
use constant headlamp mode. matically in foggy conditions. off automatically when the key is in
Turn the light switch to B in good position 1 in the ignition lock
 Turn the light switch to M. ( page 31).
time. Otherwise you could endanger
The dipped-beam headlamps, side The dipped-beam headlamps, side
yourself and others.
lamps and licence plate illumination lamps and licence plate illumination
are switched on when the engine is are switched on automatically when
running. the engine is running.

122 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Lighting

Front foglamps/rear foglamp Switching on the front foglamps


Risk of accident G  Make sure that the B dipped-
i
beam headlamps are switched on.
When the light switch is at U, When it is dark, only turn the light
you cannot switch on the front or  Pull the light switch out to the first
switch from U to B while the
rear foglamps. In this case, turn the stop.
vehicle is stationary. You could oth-
light switch to B. The green ‡ indicator lamp next
erwise cause an accident while the
to the light switch lights up.
headlamp mode is temporarily inter-
rupted.
Switching on the rear foglamp
Turn the light switch to B before
 Make sure that the B dipped-
starting a journey if you suspect fog-
beam headlamps are switched on.
gy conditions. Otherwise your vehi-
cle might not be seen and you could  Pull the light switch out to the sec-
ond stop.
thereby endanger yourself and oth-
ers. The yellow † indicator lamp
next to the light switch lights up.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 123


Controls in detail
Lighting

The thumbwheel is located to the right


Adjusting the headlamp range
of the light switch.
The headlamp range control only oper-
ates while the engine is running. E2_F1

i B7_2_P54.25-3605-31
E2_F1
Models with xenon headlamps do
not have a thumbwheel. The head- B7_1_P54.25-3604-31
lamp range is adjusted automatical-
ly.

Estate
1 Headlamp range control
Saloon
–1 Front and rear seats occupied and
1 Headlamp range control luggage compartment loaded up to
maximum rear axle load
0 Front seats occupied
1 Front and rear seats occupied or
2 Front and rear seats occupied and Driver's seat occupied and luggage
boot loaded up to maximum rear compartment loaded up to maxi-
axle load mum rear axle load
3 Driver's seat occupied and boot
loaded up to maximum rear axle 0 Front seats occupied
load 1 Front and rear seats occupied

124 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Lighting

Combination switch Headlamp flasher Switching on the hazard warning


 Pull the combination switch briefly lamps
The combination switch is located on
the left of the steering wheel. in the direction of arrow 2.  Press hazard warning lamps button
1.
Hazard warning lamps
All the turn signals flash.
The hazard warning lamps still operate
P 54.30-5309-31 if the ignition is switched off. They i
switch on automatically when an airbag When you indicate a turn, only the
is triggered. turn signal lamps on that side of the
The switch is located on the centre con- vehicle light up.
sole.
Switching off the hazard warning
lamps
1 Main-beam headlamps  Press hazard warning lamps button
2 Headlamp flasher 1 again.
P 54.25-3159-31
Switching on the main-beam i
headlamps If the hazard warning lamps have
 Turn the light switch to B or been switched on automatically,
U ( page 121). press the hazard warning lamps but-
 Push the combination switch in the ton twice.
direction of arrow 1.
1 Hazard warning lamps button
The main-beam headlamps come
on. The A main-beam indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster
lights up.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 125


Controls in detail
Lighting

Interior lighting 4 To switch the front interior lighting Switching off


on/off  Press switch 3 again.
The switches for the interior lighting are
5 Ambient lighting*
located on the overhead control panel. The interior lighting remains
6 Interior light
7 Reading lamp switched off, even if you:
 unlock the vehicle
Automatic control  open a door
 open the boot
P 82.00-2141-31 Switching on
 Press switch 3. Manual control
The interior lighting switches on
when you: Switching on the front interior
 unlock the vehicle light
 open a door  Press switch 4.

 open the boot The front interior lighting comes on.

The interior lighting has a delayed


Switching off the front interior
switch-off feature. You can set the
duration of the interior lighting de- light
Front overhead control panel
layed switch-off via the operating  Press switch 4.
1 To switch the reading lamp on/off system ( page 152). The front interior lighting goes out.
2 To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off
3 To switch the automatic control
on/off

126 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Lighting

Front reading lamps Switching off Rear reading lamps


 Press switch 2.
Switching on Switching on
The rear interior lighting goes out.
 Press switch 1.  Press switch 3.
The front reading lamp comes on. The rear reading lamp comes on.

Switching off Switching off


P 82.00-2155-31
 Press switch 1.  Press switch 3 again.
The front reading lamp goes out. The rear reading lamp goes out.

Rear interior lighting Dimming the ambient lighting*

Switching on Brighter
The interior lighting in the rear is Rear overhead control panel  Press button 1 repeatedly until
switched off using the front overhead 1 Ambient lighting* brighter the required degree of lighting is
control panel. 2 Reading lamp set.
 Press switch 2. 3 To switch the reading lamp on/off
4 Interior light Dimmer
The rear interior lighting comes on.
5 Ambient lighting*  Press button 6 repeatedly until
6 Ambient lighting* dimmer the required degree of lighting is
set.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 127


Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

You will find a full overview of the instru- If you open a door or press reset button Brighter
ment cluster in the "At a glance" sec- 1 and then do not switch on the igni-
 Turn reset button 1 clockwise.
tion ( page 20). tion or the lights, the display only re-
mains lit for about 30 seconds. The instrument lighting becomes
brighter.
You can change the display in the in-
E2_F1 strument cluster, e.g. the language set-
ting, via the operating system Dimmer
B8_P54.25-3603-31
( page 130).  Turn reset button 1 anti-clock-
wise.
Adjusting the instrument
The instrument lighting becomes
lighting dimmer.
You can adjust the brightness of the in-
strument lighting with reset button 1. Coolant temperature gauge
If you have switched on the vehicle's The coolant temperature may rise to
1 Reset button exterior lighting, the brightness of the 120 °C under normal operating condi-
The display in the instrument cluster is switches on the centre console will also tions and if the concentration of anti-
activated when you: be adjusted. freeze /corrosion inhibitor is correct.
 open a door i
 switch on the ignition The instrument lighting adjusts itself
 press reset button 1 in accordance with daylight condi-
tions.
 switch on the lights

128 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

Distronic* mode:
Resetting the trip meter Outside temperature display
 Make sure that you are viewing the One or two segments in the stored
standard display ( page 135). speed range light up.
Risk of accident G
 Press and hold the reset button on
Speedtronic mode:
the left of the instrument cluster Even if the temperature displayed is
( page 128) until the trip meter is The segments light up from the start of just above the freezing point, the
reset. the scale to the selected limit speed.
road surface may still be icy, espe-
Rev counter cially in wooded areas or on bridges.
Speedometer with segments
You should therefore always adapt
The segments in the speedometer in The red band in the rev counter indi-
cates the engine's overrevving range. your driving style and speed to suit
the instrument cluster indicate which
The speed is restricted to protect the the weather conditions in order to
speed range is available.
engine when the red band is reached. reduce the risk of an accident.
Cruise control mode:
The segments light up from the stored ! There may be a short delay before a
speed to the maximum speed. Avoid driving in the overrevving lower outside temperature is displayed,
range. Doing so could damage the for example after leaving a garage.
engine.
There may also be a short delay before
a rise in the outside temperature is dis-
played. This prevents an incorrect tem-
perature display caused by heat from
the engine when the vehicle is station-
ary or moving slowly.
You can set the unit for the outside tem-
perature display via the operating sys-
tem ( page 144).

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 129


Controls in detail
Operating system

The operating system is activated as


Multi-function steering wheel 1 Multi-function display
soon as you turn the key to position 1 in
the ignition lock. You may perform the You can control the multi-function dis- Controlling the operating
following using the operating system: play and the settings in the operating system
system with the buttons on the multi-
 Call up the information for your ve- function steering wheel. 2 Selects a submenu or adjusts
hicle the volume
 Make settings æ Up/increases the
volume
You can find out when the next service
is due, set the language for the messag- ç Down/decreases the
es in the instrument cluster and much volume
more. 3 Makes a phone call
P 46.10-2331-31
s Accepts a call
Risk of accident G Begins dialling

Only use the operating system when t Hangs up


road and traffic conditions permit. Rejects an incoming call
Otherwise you will be too distracted. 4 Jumps from one menu to another
è Forwards
ÿ Back
5 Scrolls within a menu
j Forwards
k Back

130 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

The multi-function display changes You can think of the order of the menus The Settings menu contains sub-
when you press one of these buttons on and functions in a menu as a circle: menus instead of functions with which
the multi-function steering wheel.  If you press the è or ÿ but- you can call up or change a setting. The
Several functions are combined the- ton enough times, each menu will way in which you control these submen-
matically in the menus. For example, appear one after the other. us is described in the "Settings menu"
the AUDIO menu contains functions for section ( page 140).
 If you press the k or j but-
operating the radio or CD player. You ton enough times, each menu func- The number of menus depends on the
can use a function to call up informa- tion will appear one after the other. optional equipment in your vehicle.
tion or to change the settings for your
vehicle.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 131


Controls in detail
Operating system

This is what the display looks like when The explanations for the individual men-
Menu overview
you scroll through the menus. us are shown in the following table.

E2_P54.32-2319-31de
en
fr
it
sp

132 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

The illustration shows you the menus using a vehicle with COMAND APS* as an example. The menus and their individual func-
tions are shown below.

Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4


Standard display AUDIO NAVI* Distronic*
Display the outside temper- Select a radio station Display route guidance Call up the setting
ature or digital speedome-
ter
Commands/submenus

Check the tyre pressures* Operate the CD player*/


CD changer*
Display the digital speed- Operate the cassette
ometer or outside tempera- player*
ture
Call up ASSYST PLUS
Check the engine oil level

i The related generic term should In vehicles with Audio 20*, the operat-
make it easier for you to familiarise ing system displays the audio and
The tabular overview of the menus
yourself with the menus. phone menus in English. The display for
contains generic terms which are
these menus is not dependent on the
not always shown in the operating The operating system displays the language selected for the display.
system. new function range directly with the
first menu function.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 133


Controls in detail
Operating system

Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8


Malfunction memory Settings Trip computer TEL*
Call up malfunction memo- Reset to factory settings Consumption statistics af- Enter PIN
ry ter start
Instrument cluster sub- Consumption statistics af- Look for a name in the
Commands/submenus

menu ter reset phone book


Time/date submenu Call up the range Look for the last phone
number dialled
Lighting submenu
Vehicle submenu
Heater* submenu
Convenience* submenu
Dynamic driving seat* sub-
menu

134 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

Instead of the outside temperature, you Displaying the digital speedome-


Standard display menu
can also display the digital speedome- ter, status line
The basic setting shows the current ter. You can select the setting in the in-
outside temperature and the trip meter  Press the k or j button re-
strument cluster submenu using the
in the multi-function display. This is peatedly until you see the digital
Basic display function
called the standard display. speedometer in the display.
( page 145).
The current speed is shown in the
You can select the following function in
E2_F1 display.
the standard display menu by pressing
de P P54.32-2320-31 the k or j button.

Function Page E2_F1_


P54.32-2321-31de
Display the outside temper- 135
ature or digital speedome-
1 Outside temperature
ter
2 Trip meter
Check the tyre pressures* 313 1 Digital speedometer
If you see a different display, press the
è or ÿ button repeatedly until Display the digital speed- 135 2 Status line with outside tempera-
the standard display is shown. ometer or outside tempera- ture
ture 3 Trip meter
Call up ASSYST PLUS 328
Check the engine oil level 308

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 135


Controls in detail
Operating system

Instead of the outside temperature1, You can operate the following equip- de P 54.30-5341-31
you can also display the digital speed- ment:
ometer in the status line. You can select en P 54.30-5358-31
the setting in the instrument cluster Function Page fr P 54.30-5408-31
submenu using the Status line Select a radio station 136 it P 54.30-5454-30
display function ( page 145).
Operate the CD player*/ 137 sp P 54.30-5500-30
CD changer* 1 Frequency range
1 Except for vehicles in the United King-
dom, the digital speedometer is always Operate the cassette 137 2 Station
displayed. player*  Press the k or j button re-
peatedly until you have found the
Audio menu Selecting a radio station station you require.
You can control the audio equipment*
 Switch on the radio. For notes on
which you have just switched on using
how to do this, see the separate Op- i
the functions in the AUDIO menu. You can only store new stations us-
erating Instructions.
If no audio equipment has been ing the radio. For notes on how to do
 Press the è or ÿ button re-
switched on and: this, see the separate Operating In-
peatedly until you see the station
structions.
 Audio 20* is installed, the AUDIO you have just selected in the dis-
off message appears in the dis- play. You can also operate the radio in the
play same way as usual.
 Audio 50 APS* or COMAND APS* is
installed, the AUDIO off message
appears in the display

136 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

Operating the CD player* de P 54.30-5342-31


E2_F1_P54.32-2323-31de
 Switch on the radio and select the en P 54.30-5361-31
en
CD player. For notes on how to do fr P 54.30-5409-31 fr
this, see the separate Operating In-
it P 54.30-5455-31 it
structions.
sp
 Press the è or ÿ button re- sp P 54.30-5501-31
peatedly until you see the settings Audio 50 APS* or COMAND APS* Audio 50 APS* display
for the CD being played in the dis-
display
play. 1 Current side
1 Current CD (with CD changer*)
2 Current track Switching to side 1
E2_F1_  Press the k or j button re-  Press the k button.
peatedly until you have selected the
P54.32-2322-31de
desired track. Switching to side 2
 Press the j button.
Operating the cassette deck*
Audio 20* system display  Switch on the radio and select the Navi* menu
1 Current CD (with CD changer) cassette deck. For notes on how to In the Navigation menu, you can display
2 Current track do this, see the separate Operating the route guidance function in the navi-
Instructions. gation system.
 Press the è or ÿ button re-  Press the è or ÿ button re-
peatedly until you see the settings peatedly until you see the Naviga-
for the cassette being played in the tion menu in the display.
display.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 137


Controls in detail
Operating system

If Audio 50 APS* or COMAND APS*  When route guidance is activated,  Press the è or ÿ button re-
is not switched on, the NAV off the following display is shown: peatedly until you see one of the
message is shown in the display. following two pictures in the dis-
 Switch on Audio 50 APS* or E2_F1_P54.32-2325-31de play.
COMAND APS*. For notes on
how to do this, see the separate Distronic deactivated
Operating Instructions. When Distronic is deactivated, you will
You will see different messages in the see the standard display.
display, depending on the status of the
navigation system: You can read about how to activate
route guidance in the Audio 50 APS* or
 If route guidance is not activated, COMAND APS* Operating Instructions. P 54.30-5134-31
the display will show the direction
of travel and the name of the street Distronic* menu
on which you are currently driving,
You can read the current Distronic set-
provided that the navigation system
tings in the Distronic menu. The display
recognises this street: 1 Vehicle in front, if detected
shown depends on whether Distronic is
2 Actual distance to the vehicle in
activated or deactivated.
E2_F1_P54.32-2324-31de front
For how to activate or deactivate Dis- 3 Specified minimum distance to the
en tronic, please refer to the "Driving sys- vehicle in front
fr tems" section ( page 227). 4 Own vehicle
it 5 Symbol for activated distance warn-
sp ing function
1 Direction of travel
2 Street name

138 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

Distronic activated Malfunction memory menu No malfunction messages


When Distronic is activated, you will You can call up malfunctions which If no malfunctions have occurred, the
see the Distronic display in the mul- have occurred in the malfunction mem- No Malfunction message appears
ti-function display and one or two seg- ory menu. The display shown depends in the display.
ments light up in the speedometer on whether malfunctions have occurred
within the range of the stored desired or not. Malfunctions occurred
speed.
If malfunctions have occurred, you will
Risk of accident G see the number of malfunctions in the
display:
P 54.30-5135-31
The operating system only records de P 54.30-6632 -31
malfunctions and warnings from
certain systems. You should there-
fore make sure that your vehicle is
1 Distronic is activated safe to use. Otherwise you could en-
danger yourself and others.

1 Number of malfunctions
 Press the è or ÿ button re-
peatedly until you see the appropri-
ate malfunction memory message
in the display.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 139


Controls in detail
Operating system

 Press the k or j button.


Settings menu Function Page
You can scroll through the malfunc- In the Settings... menu, there are Reset all settings 141
tion messages in sequence. The two functions:
possible malfunction messages are Submenus in the Settings 141
 The To reset: Press reset menu
described in the "Practical advice"
section ( page 344). button for 3 seconds func-
tion, which you can use to reset all Reset the functions of a 142
If malfunctions occur during your jour- the settings to the factory settings submenu
ney, you will see the number of mal- Instrument cluster sub- 144
 A collection of submenus which you
functions displayed again when your menu
journey is complete (turn the ignition can use to make individual settings
key to position 0 or remove it). for your vehicle Time/date submenu 146

 Press the reset button on the left in  Press the è or ÿ button re- Lighting submenu 149
the instrument cluster ( page 20) peatedly until you see the Set- Vehicle submenu 152
repeatedly until you have seen all tings... menu in the display.
Heater* submenu 154
the malfunction messages. de P 54.30-5353-31
Convenience* submenu 154
en P 54.30-5367-31
i Dynamic driving seat* 156
If you turn the key back to position 1 fr P 54.30-5413-31
or 2 in the ignition lock, you will it P 54.30-5459-31
clear the malfunction memory.
Should any malfunctions occur sp P 54.30-5505-31
again, they will be displayed again.

140 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

Resetting all settings i Submenus in the Settings menu


You can return the functions of all the If you do not press the reset button  Press the k or j button.
submenus to the factory settings. a second time to confirm, the The collection of submenus is
 To do this, press the reset button changed settings are retained. shown in the display.
on the left in the instrument cluster You will see the Settings...
for approximately three seconds. menu again after approximately five E2_F1_P54.32-2326-31de
You will see the request in the dis- seconds.
en
play to press the reset button once For safety reasons, not all the func- fr
more to confirm. tions are reset while you are driving: it
 Press the reset button again.  the Light circuit head- sp
All the submenu functions are re- lamp mode function in the
 Press the ç button.
stored to their factory settings. Lighting submenu
 the Key dependence function The bar moves to the next sub-
in the Convenience submenu menu.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 141


Controls in detail
Operating system

The submenus are arranged in a hierar- Resetting the functions of a i


chy. You can scroll down by pressing submenu If you do not press the reset button
the ç button and up by pressing the
You can reset the functions in each sub- a second time to confirm, the
æ button.
menu to the factory settings. changed settings are retained.
You can move to the individual func-
 Select a function in a submenu. You will see the Settings...
tions within the submenus by pressing
 Press the reset button on the left in
menu again after approximately five
the k or j button.
the instrument cluster for approxi- seconds.
You can make the settings as before us-
mately three seconds.
ing the æ or ç button.
A prompt will appear in the display
requesting you to press the reset
button once more to confirm.
 Press the reset button again.
All the submenu functions are re-
turned to their factory settings.

142 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

This table shows the settings you can make in the individual submenus. You will find additional information on the subsequent
pages.
:

Instrument Time/date Lighting Vehicle Heater* Convenience* Dynamic


cluster driving
seat*
Select tempera- Set the hours Set constant Set permanent Set the Activate the Adjust the
ture display unit (clock)* headlamp mode Speedtronic switch-on time easy-entry fea- driver's seat*
ture
Select the speed Set the min- Set surround Set automatic Set the key de- Adjust the
and total dis- utes (clock)* lighting locking pendence front-passen-
tance recorder ger seat*
display unit
Select the lan- Select time Set the ambient Set the boot lid Set the parking
guage display mode lighting* opening limiter* position for the
exterior mirrors
Set the status Set the day Set exterior Fold in the exte-
line display (date) lighting delayed rior mirrors
switch-off when locking
the vehicle
Select the basic Set the Set interior light-
display month (date) ing delayed
switch-off
Select the tyre Set the year
pressure* dis- (date)
play unit

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 143


Controls in detail
Operating system

Instrument cluster submenu Selecting the temperature Selecting the speed and total
You can access the Instr. cluster display unit distance recorder display unit
submenu via the Settings... menu.  Move the bar to the Instr.  Move the bar to the Instr.
You can define the displays in the in- cluster submenu using the æ cluster submenu using the æ
strument cluster in the Instr. or ç button. or ç button.
cluster submenu.
 Press the j or k button re-  Press the k or j button re-
The following displays can be defined: peatedly until the Temp. indi- peatedly, until you see the Dis-
cator message appears in the play unit message in the
Function Page display. display.
Select the temperature dis- 144 The current setting is highlighted. The current setting is highlighted.
play unit
de P 54.30-5148-31 de P 54.30-5149-31
Select the speed and total 144
en P 54.30-5369-31 en P 54.30-5370-31
distance recorder display
unit fr P 54.30-5415-31 fr P 54.30-5416-31
Select the language 145 it P 54.30-5461-31 it P 54.30-5462-31
Set the status line display 145 sp P 54.30-5507-31 sp P 54.30-5508-31
Select the basic display 145  Press the æ or ç button to  Press the æ or ç button to
Select the tyre pressure* 146 select the temperature display in select the unit for all the displays1
display unit °C (degrees Celsius) or °F (de- in km (kilometres) or miles.
grees Fahrenheit).
1 Vehicles for the United Kingdom:
Only the settings for the total distance
recorder, trip meter and trip computer
are accepted.

144 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

Selecting the language  French Selecting the basic display


 Move the bar to the Instr.  Spanish  Move the bar to the Instr.
cluster submenu using the æ cluster submenu using the æ
or ç button. Setting the status line display or ç button.
 Press the j or k button re-  Move the bar to the Instr.  Press the j or k button re-
peatedly until you see the Langu- cluster submenu using the æ peatedly until you see the Basic
age message in the display. or ç button. display message.
The current setting is highlighted.  Press the j or k button re- The current setting is highlighted.
peatedly until you see the Status
de P 54.30-5150-31 de P 54.30-5152-31
line display message.
en P 54.30-5371-31 en P 54.30-5373-31
The current setting is highlighted.
fr P 54.30-5417-31 fr P 54.30-5419-31
de P 54.30-5151-31
it P 54.30-5463-31 it P 54.30-5465-31
en P 54.30-5372-31
sp P 54.30-5509-31 sp P 54.30-5511-31
fr P 54.30-5418-31
 Select the language in which the  Select the Outside temp. or
operating system messages are to it P 54.30-5464-31 Speed display in the basic display
appear in the display using the sp P 54.30-5510-31 using the æ or ç button.
æ or ç button.
 Select the Outside temp. or
You can select Speed display in the status line us-
 German ing the æ or ç button.
 English
 Italian

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 145


Controls in detail
Operating system

Selecting the tyre pressure* Time/date submenu Setting the hours


display unit You can access the Time/Date sub- You will only see this function if:
 Move the bar to the Instr. menu via the Settings... menu.  you have an Audio 20* system in-
cluster submenu using the æ You can define the displays in the in- stalled
or ç button. strument cluster in the Time/Date
submenu.  you have no audio system
 Press the j or k button re-
peatedly, until you see the Dis- The following displays can be defined:  Move the bar to the Time/Date
play unit Tyre pressure submenu using the æ or ç
message in the display. Function Page button.
Set the hours (clock)* 146  Press the j or k button re-
The current setting is highlighted.
peatedly until you see the
de P 54.30-5153-31 Set the minutes (clock)* 147 Clock, hours message.
en P 54.30-5374-31 Select the time display* 147 The edit mark appears on the hour
fr P 54.30-5420-31 Set the day (date)* 148 figure.
it P 54.30-5466-31 Set the month (date)* 148 de P 54.30-5126-31
sp P 54.30-5512-31 Set the year (date)* 148 en P 54.30-5376-31

 Select the tyre pressure display unit fr P 54.30-5422-31


in bar or psi using the æ or i it P 54.30-5468-31
ç button. For how to set the clock using
COMAND APS* and sp P 54.30-5514-31
Audio 50 APS*, see the separate
Operating Instructions.

146 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

 Set the hour by pressing the æ de P 54.30-5127-31  Press the j or k button re-
or ç button. en P 54.30-5377-31 peatedly until you see the Dis-
 Press the reset button on the left in
play mode message.
fr P 54.30-5423-31
the instrument cluster ( page 20). The current setting is highlighted.
it P 54.30-5469-31
The hour time you have set is ac- de P 54.30-5128-31
cepted. sp P 54.30-5515-31
en P 54.30-5378-31
 Set the minutes by pressing the
Setting the minutes fr P 54.30-5424-31
æ or ç button.
You will only see this function if:  Press the reset button on the left in it P 54.30-5470-31

 you have an Audio 20* system in- the instrument cluster ( page 20). sp P 54.30-5516-31
stalled The minute time you have set is ac-  Select the 12h or 24h time display
 you have no audio system cepted. using the æ or ç button.
 Move the bar to the Time/Date
Selecting the time display mode
submenu using the æ or ç
button. You will only see this function if you
have auxiliary heating.
 Press the j or k button
repeatedly until you see the  Move the bar to the Time/Date
Clock, minutes message. submenu using the æ or ç
button.
The edit mark appears on the min-
utes figure.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 147


Controls in detail
Operating system

Setting the day Setting the month Setting the year


You will only see this function if You will only see this function if You will only see this function if:
 you have an Audio 20* system in-  you have an Audio 20* system in-  you have an Audio 20* system in-
stalled stalled stalled
 you have no audio system  you have no audio system  you have no audio system
 Move the bar to the Time/Date  Move the bar to the Time/Date  Move the bar to the Time/Date
submenu using the æ or ç submenu using the æ or ç submenu using the æ or ç
button. button. button.
 Press the j or k button re-  Press the j or k button re-  Press the j or k button re-
peatedly until you see the Set peatedly until you see the Set peatedly until you see the Set
date day message in the display. date month message in the dis- date year message in the dis-
The edit mark appears on the day. play. play.
The edit mark appears on the The edit mark appears on the year.
de P 54.30-5129-31 month.
en P 54.30-5379-31 de P 54.30-5131-31
de P 54.30-5130-31 en P 54.30-5381-31
fr P 54.30-5425-31
en P 54.30-5380-31
fr P 54.30-5427-31
it P 54.30-5471-31
fr P 54.30-5426-31
it P 54.30-5473-31
sp P 54.30-5517-31
it P 54.30-5472-31
 Set the day by pressing the æ or sp P 54.30-5519-31
ç button. sp P 54.30-5518-31  Set the year by pressing the æ
 Set the month by pressing the æ or ç button.
or ç button.

148 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

Lighting submenu Setting constant headlamp mode  Select whether you wish to operate
the lighting manually or whether
You can access the Lighting sub- For safety reasons, you can only make
you wish to set constant headlamp
menu via the Settings... menu. this setting while the vehicle is station-
mode by pressing the æ or ç
You can set your vehicle's lighting in the ary. In countries in which constant
button.
Lighting submenu. headlamp mode is a legal requirement,
constant is the factory setting. If you have set constant headlamp
You can make the following settings:
mode and the light switch is in the
 Move the bar to the Lighting
M position, the following light up
Function Page submenu using the æ or ç
automatically when the engine is
Set constant headlamp 149 button.
running:
mode  Press the j or k button re-
 Side lamps and dipped-beam
Set the surround lighting 150 peatedly until you see the Light
headlamps
circuit headlamp mode mes-
Set the ambient lighting* 150 sage.  Licence plate illumination
Set exterior lighting delayed 151 The current setting is highlighted.
switch-off i
de P 54.30-5154-31 If you turn the light switch to another
Set interior lighting delayed 152
en P 54.30-5382-31 position, the appropriate light
switch-off
switches on.
fr P 54.30-5428-31
it P 54.30-5474-31
sp P 54.30-5520-31

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 149


Controls in detail
Operating system

i The surround lighting switches off when Setting ambient lighting*


you open the driver's door. The sur-
For safety reasons, you cannot reset This function allows you to adjust the
round lighting is automatically switched
the Light circuit headlamp brightness of the ambient lighting.
off after 40 seconds.
mode to the factory setting while you  Move the bar to the Lighting
are driving. You will then see the follo-  Move the bar to the Lighting submenu using the æ or ç
wing message in the display: Light- submenu using the æ or ç
button.
ing cannot be completely button.
 Press the j or k button re-
reset to factory settings  Press the j or k button re-
while driving! peatedly until you see the Ambi-
peatedly until you see the Func-
ent light message.
tion Surround lighting
Setting surround lighting message. The current setting is highlighted.
If you switch on the surround lighting, The current setting is highlighted. de P 54.30-66318-31
the following light up in the dark after
you have unlocked the vehicle using the E2_F1_P54.32-2327-31de
remote control:
en
 the side lamps fr
 the tail lamps it
 the licence plate illumination sp
 the front foglamps  Using the æ or ç button,
 the lights in the exterior mirrors* switch surround lighting on or off.

150 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

 Select the brightness of the lights  the front foglamps de P 54.30-5360-31


using the æ or ç button.  the lights in the exterior mirrors*
You can select the following:
i
 0, the ambient lighting is swit-
ched off. You can reactivate this function
within ten minutes by opening a
 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, the ambient lighting door.
is switched on. 1 is the lowest  Select the length of time for which
and 5 is the highest setting. If none of the doors are opened after you wish the lights to remain on by
the engine is switched off or if a door pressing the æ or ç button.
is not closed after it has been
Setting the exterior lighting de- You can select the following:
opened, the lights go out after
layed switch-off feature 60 seconds.  0s, delayed switch-off is deac-
You can set whether and for how long tivated
you wish the exterior lighting to remain  Move the bar to the Lighting  15s, 30s, 45s or 60s, the de-
on in the dark after closing the doors by submenu using the æ or ç layed switch-off is activated
using the Headlamps delayed button.
switch-off function. When you have You can temporarily deactivate delayed
 Press the j or k button re- switch-off:
set the delayed switch-off and switched
peatedly until you see the Head-
off the engine, the following light up:  To do this, turn the key to position
lamps delayed switch-off
 the side lamps message. 0 in the ignition lock before leaving
the vehicle.
 the tail lamps The current setting is highlighted.
 the licence plate illumination

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 151


Controls in detail
Operating system

 Then turn it to position 2 and back de P 54.30-5158-31 You can make the following settings:
to 0. en P 54.30-5386-31
Delayed switch-off is deactivated. It Function Page
fr P 54.30-5432-31
is reactivated as soon as you start Set permanent Speedtronic 241
the engine again. it P 54.30-5478-31
Set automatic locking 152
sp P 54.30-5524-31
Set the boot lid/tailgate* 153
Setting interior lighting delayed
 Select the length of time you wish opening limiter*
switch-off the lights to remain on by pressing
This function allows you to set whether the æ or ç button. Setting the automatic locking
and for how long you wish the interior You can select the following:
lighting to remain on in the dark after You can use this function to activate or
you have removed the key from the ig-  0s, delayed switch-off is deac- deactivate automatic central locking. If
nition lock. tivated the automatic locking function is acti-
vated, your vehicle will lock centrally
 Move the bar to the Lighting  5s, 10s, 15s or 20s, delayed
from a speed of about 10 mph
submenu using the æ or ç switch-off is activated
(15 km/h) upwards. For further infor-
button. mation, see Automatic locking
Vehicle submenu ( page 104).
 Press the j or k button re-
peatedly until you see the Int. You can access the Vehicle submenu
illumination delayed via the Settings... menu. You can
switch-off message in the dis- select your vehicle's general settings in
play. the Vehicle submenu.
The current setting is highlighted.

152 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

 Move the bar to the Vehicle sub- Boot lid/Easy-Pack tailgate open-
menu using the æ or ç but- E2_F1_P54.32-2329-31de
ing limiter*
ton. en
This function allows you to activate and
 Press the j or k button re- deactivate the opening limiter for the fr
peatedly until you see the Auto- boot lid (Saloon) and the tailgate (Es- it
matic door lock message. tate). sp
The current setting is highlighted.  Move the bar to the Vehicle sub- Display for Saloon
menu using the æ or ç but-
E2_F1_P54.32-2328-31de ton.
E2_F1_P54.32-2330-31de
en  Press the j or k button re-
peatedly until you see the following en
fr
message in the display: fr
it
it
sp  For Saloon:
sp
Opening limiter
 Switch the automatic door lock on
Boot lid Display for Estate
or off using the æ or ç but-
ton. or  Switch the opening limiter on or
 For Estate: off using the æ or ç but-
Opening limiter ton.
Tailgate.
The current setting is highlighted.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 153


Controls in detail
Operating system

Heater submenu* Convenience submenu* Activating the easy-entry feature


You can only see the Heater submenu You can access the Convenience You can activate or deactivate the easy-
if your vehicle has auxiliary heating*. submenu via the Settings... menu. entry feature with this function
You can access the Heater submenu You can set a number of convenience ( page 106).
via the Settings... menu. You can features in the Convenience sub-  Move the bar to the Conveni-
set several switch-on times for the aux- menu. ence submenu using the æ or
iliary heating in this submenu. However, You can make the following settings: ç button.
only one switch-on time may be activat-
ed at any one time.  Press the j or k button re-
Function Page peatedly until you see the Func-
You can make the following settings: Activate the easy-entry fea- 154 tion Easy-entry feature
ture message in the display.
Function Page
Set the key dependence 155 The current setting is highlighted.
Set the switch-on time 209
Set the parking position for 155 de P 54.30-5145-31
the exterior mirrors en P 54.30-5391-31
Fold in the exterior mirrors 156
fr P 54.30-5437-31
when locking the vehicle
it P 54.30-5483-31
sp P 54.30-5529-31

154 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

 Select the function you require us-  Move the bar to the Conveni- Setting the parking position for
ing the æ or ç button. ence submenu using the æ or the exterior mirrors
You can make the following set- ç button.
The Mirror adjustment par-
tings for the easy-entry feature:  Press the j or k button re- king aid feature allows you to deter-
Off The easy-entry feature peatedly until you see the Key- mine whether the exterior mirror on the
is deactivated dependent message in the dis- front-passenger side should tilt down-
play. wards when parking (with reverse gear
Steering col.
The current setting is highlighted. engaged) ( page 177).
Only the steering col-
umn is moved  Move the bar to the Conveni-
E2_F1_P54.32-2331-31de ence submenu using the æ or
Steer.col+seat
ç button.
The steering column en
and seat are moved fr  Press the j or k button re-
it peatedly until you see the Mirror
Storing key dependence sp adjustment parking aid
message in the display.
For safety reasons, you can only make  Switch the key-dependence on or
this setting while the vehicle is station- The current setting is highlighted.
off using the æ or ç but-
ary. You can determine whether stored ton.
settings for the seat, steering wheel, E2_F1_P54.32-2332-31de
mirrors and other operating system set- i en
tings are stored as key-dependent set- The driver's seat and the steering fr
tings. wheel position will also be stored if it
you have selected Steer. sp
col.+seat in the Easy-entry sys-
tem menu.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 155


Controls in detail
Operating system

 Switch the mirror adjustment park-  Press the j or k button re- You can make the following settings:
ing aid on or off by pressing the peatedly until you see the Fold
æ or ç button. in mirrors when locking Function Page
message in the display. Adjust the driver's seat* 156
Folding in the exterior mirrors The current setting is highlighted. Adjust the front-passenger 156
when locking the vehicle
seat*
The Fold in mirrors when lo- E2_F1_P54.32-2333-31de
cking function allows you to deter- en Adapting the driver's and front-
mine whether the exterior mirrors passenger seat
fr
should fold in when you lock the vehi-
it The Driv. dyn. seat adjust-
cle.
sp ment function allows you to determine
i  Switch the mirror adjustment park-
how the seat should adjust during a
If you have switched the function on journey.
ing aid on or off by pressing the
and you fold in the exterior mirrors æ or ç button.  Move the bar to the Driv. dyn.
using the button on the door seat adjustment submenu us-
( page 176), they will not fold out Dynamic driving seat* submenu ing the æ or ç button.
when the ignition is switched on.  Press the j or k button re-
The exterior mirrors can then only You can access the Dynamic seat
submenu via the Settings... menu. peatedly until you see the following
be folded out using the button on message in the display:
the door. You can make the basic settings for the
dynamic driving seats in the Dynamic  Dyn.Multi-cont. Seat,
seat submenu. driver for the driver's seat
 Move the bar to the Conveni-
ence submenu using the æ or or
ç button.

156 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

 Dyn.Multi-cont. Seat,
Trip computer menu
fr.pass for the front-passen-
ger seat You can call up statistical data for your de P 54.30-6795-31
vehicle in the Trip computer menu.
The current setting is highlighted. You may call up the following informa-
de P 54.30-6668-31 tion:

Function Page
1 Distance driven since start
Consumption statistics af- 157 2 Time elapsed since the ignition was
ter start switched on
Consumption statistics af- 158 3 Average speed since start
ter reset 4 Average fuel consumption since
 Select the seat adjustment you re- start
quire using the æ or ç but- Call up the range 158
ton. i
You can select the following: Consumption statistics after If you turn the key to position 0 in
start the ignition lock or remove it, all the
 Level 1 for a comfortable
seat setting.  Press the è or ÿ button re- values are reset after approximate-
peatedly until you see the After ly four hours.
 Level 2 for a sporty, dynam-
start message in the display. The values will not be reset if you
ic seat setting.
turn the key back to position 1 or 2
during this time.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 157


Controls in detail
Operating system

Resetting the consumption Resetting consumption statistics


statistics automatically
de P 54.30-6796-31
 Press and hold the reset button on The consumption statistics are auto-
the left in the instrument cluster matically reset to "0" if one of the fol-
( page 20) until the consumption lowing is exceeded:
statistics have been reset to "0".  Distance covered: 60,000 miles
1 Distance driven since last reset (100,000 km)
Consumption statistics since the 2 Time elapsed since the last reset  Time elapsed: 10,000 hours
last reset This is measured as soon as the ig-
 Press the è or ÿ button re- nition is switched on Calling up the range
peatedly until you see the After 3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since  Press the ÿ or è button re-
start message in the display.
last reset peatedly until you see the After
 Press the j or k button re- start message in the display.
peatedly until you see the After
Resetting consumption statistics  Press the j or k button re-
reset message in the display.
manually peatedly until the Range: message
appears in the display.
 Press and hold the reset button on
the left in the instrument cluster de P 54.30-5165-31
( page 20) until the consumption en P 54.30-5397-31
statistics have been reset to "0".
fr P 54.30-5443-31
it P 54.30-5489-31
sp P 54.30-5535-31

158 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

You will see in the display the approxi-  If the mobile phone is switched off  Enter the PIN using the mobile
mate distance which can be covered by and: phone, Linguatronic*,
the tank's contents and your style of  Audio 20* is installed, the Audio 20*, Audio 50 APS* or
driving. TEL off message is shown COMAND APS*.

 Audio 50 APS or COMAND The mobile phone searches for


TEL menu*
APS* is installed, the TEL off a network. The display remains
You can operate your telephone using empty during this time.
the functions in the TEL menu provided message is shown
 As soon as the mobile phone has
it is connected to the Mercedes-Benz
hands-free system.
i found a network, the appropriate
The TEL Enter PIN message ap- GSM network provider is shown in
 Switch on the telephone and the display.
pears for five seconds after you
Audio 20*, Audio 50 APS* or CO- have switched on the engine to re-
MAND APS*. For notes on how to mind you to enter the PIN.
do this, see the separate Operating de P 54.30-6797-31
Instructions.
 If you have not yet entered a PIN
 Press the ÿ or è button re- and:
peatedly until you see the TEL
 Audio 20* is installed, the TEL
menu in the display.
PIN message appears in the
You will see different messages in the display 1 Network provider
display, depending on the status of the
 Audio 50 APS* or  You can now operate the mobile
mobile phone:
COMAND APS* is installed, the phone.
TEL Enter PIN message ap-
pears in the display

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 159


Controls in detail
Operating system

Accepting a call  Press the s button.  Press the j or k button.

You may accept an incoming call at any You have accepted the call. You will The operating system reads the
time provided your mobile phone is see the call duration in the display. phone book stored on the SIM card
ready to receive calls. You will see the or in the mobile phone. This could
following message in the display: i last up to 30 seconds. If:
If you do not wish to accept the call,  Audio 20* is installed, the
press the t button. Processing message ap-
E2_F1_P54.32-2334-31de
pears in the display
Ending a call
 Audio 50 APS* or
 Press the t button. COMAND APS* is installed, the
You have finished the call. The dis- Please wait message ap-
play now shows the operational pears in the display
Audio 20* display readiness symbol again.  Press the j or k button re-
peatedly until the name being
E2_F1_P54.32-2335-31de Dialling a number from the searched for appears in the display.
en phone book The stored names are displayed al-
fr You may select and dial a number from phabetically from A to Z, or Z to A.
it the phone book at any time, provided
sp your mobile phone is ready to receive
calls.
Audio 30 APS or COMAND APS*
 Press the ÿ or è button re-
display
peatedly until you see the TEL
menu with the operational readi-
ness symbol in the display.

160 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Operating system

 Press the s button. Redialling


E2_F1_P54.32-2336-31de The operating system dials the se- The operating system stores the last
lected phone number. If: phone numbers which were dialled.
 Audio 20* is installed, the This means that you do not have to
dialling message appears search through the entire phone book.
in the display  Press the ÿ or è button re-
1 Name from the phone book  Audio 30 APS* or peatedly until you see the TEL
COMAND APS* is installed, the menu with the operational readi-
i phone number appears in the ness symbol in the display.
If you do not wish to make a call, display  Press the s button.
press the t button. The operating system stores the di- You will see the first number in the
alled number in the redial memory. redial memory in the display.
Vehicles with Audio 20* or
Audio 50 APS*: If a connection is made, you will see the
name of the person you are calling and E2_F1_P54.32-2338-31de
If you press the j or k but- the call duration in the display.
ton for a longer period, the operat-
ing system scrolls through the
names rapidly. Releasing the button E2_F1_P54.32-2337-31de
stops the rapid scroll.
1 Number or name stored in the redi-
al memory

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 161


Controls in detail
Operating system

 Press the j or k button re- If a connection is made, you will see the
peatedly until the number or name call duration and:
being searched for appears in the  the name in the display (provided
display. the latter is stored in the phone
book)
i
If you do not wish to make a call, or
press the t button.  the number of the person you are
calling
 Press the s button.
The operating system dials the se-
lected phone number.

162 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Manual transmission
 Manual transmission
You will find information about driving
Risk of accident G Risk of accident G with a manual transmission in the "Get-
ting started" section ( page 45).
The movement of the pedals must Do not change down for additional
not be impaired in any way. Do not engine braking on a slippery road
keep any objects in the driver's foot- surface. This could cause the drive
well. Make sure that there is suffi- wheels to lose their grip and the ve-
cient clearance around the pedals hicle could skid. E2_F1
when floormats or carpets are used. B9_P26.60-2199-31
Always apply the parking brake
when parking. Risk of fire G
Never leave children unsupervised
Make sure that the exhaust system
in the vehicle. They could move the
does not come into contact with Manual transmission gearshift
gear lever and the vehicle could roll
easily ignitable material such as dry pattern
away on uphill or downhill gradients.
grass or petrol. The material could
Do not downshift if your speed is otherwise ignite and set parts of the
above the maximum speed for the vehicle alight.
desired gear. The drive wheels could
lock.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 163


Controls in detail
Manual transmission

! Engaging reverse gear


Do not exceed the maximum speed
for each gear ( page 450). !
Only engage reverse gear when the
Changing down at too high a speed
vehicle is stationary, otherwise the
(transmission braking) can cause
transmission could be damaged.
the engine to overspeed which could
in turn cause engine damage.
 Pull the gear lever up and slide it
backwards and to the left.

164 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*
 Automatic transmission*
You will find information about driving
Risk of accident G Do not change down for additional
engine braking on a slippery road
with the automatic transmission in the
"Getting started" section ( page 45).
The movement of the pedals must surface. This could cause the drive
The transmission shift system automat-
not be impaired in any way. Do not wheels to lose their grip and the ve- ically adapts to your individual driving
keep any objects in the driver's foot- hicle could skid. style by continuously adjusting its shift
well. Make sure that there is suffi- points. These shift point adjustments
cient clearance around the pedals take into account the current operating
when floormats or carpets are used. Risk of fire G and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
Always apply the parking brake
Make sure that the exhaust system automatic transmission reacts by ad-
when parking.
does not come into contact with justing the gearshift program.
Never leave children unsupervised easily ignitable material, such as dry
in the vehicle. They could move the grass or petrol. The material could
selector lever and the vehicle could otherwise ignite and set parts of the
roll away on uphill or downhill gradi- vehicle alight.
ents.
Do not downshift if your speed is
above the maximum speed for the
desired gear. The drive wheels could
lock.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 165


Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

When the selector lever is in position D,


you can influence the gearshifts made
E2_F1 by the automatic transmission by:
E2_F1 B12_P54.32-2301-31  restricting the shift range and
B11_P27.60-2346-31  changing gear yourself

1 Shift range
2 Gearshift program C/S
The current shift range and the gear-
The individual gears are selected auto- shift program (C/S) are displayed in
the speedometer.
matically. The gear selected depends
on:
 the selector lever position D with
the shift ranges ( page 169)
 the gearshift program selected
(C/S) ( page 170)
 the position of the accelerator ped-
al ( page 170)
 the road speed

166 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

Selector lever positions N Neutral D Drive

P Parking lock No power is transmitted from The transmission changes gear


the engine to the drive wheels. automatically. All the forward
Prevents the vehicle from roll- Releasing the brakes will allow gears are available.
ing away when stopped. Only you to move the vehicle freely,
move the selector lever to P e.g. push it, tow it or put it
when the vehicle is stationary. One-touch gearshifting
through a car wash.
The key can only be removed When the selector lever is in position D,
Do not move the selector lever you can perform gearshifts yourself,
when the selector lever is in po- to N while you are driving. The
sition P. The selector lever is even on vehicles with automatic trans-
transmission could otherwise mission.
locked in position P when the be damaged.
key is removed.
If ESP has been switched off or Downshifting
R Reverse gear has malfunctioned:
 Press the selector lever briefly to
Only move the selector lever to Only move the selector lever to
the left towards D–.
R when the vehicle is station- N if the vehicle is in danger of
ary. skidding, e.g. on icy roads. The transmission shifts to the next
gear down, depending on the gear
currently selected. Doing this also
restricts the shift range
( page 169).

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 167


Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

Upshifting Selecting the most effective


Risk of accident G  Press the selector lever briefly to shift range
the right towards D+.  Press and hold the selector lever to-
Do not downshift until the speed at wards D–.
The transmission shifts to the next
which you are driving is within the
gear up, depending on the gearshift The transmission will shift to a
permissible range for the required program. Doing this also extends range which allows ideal accelera-
gear ( page 452). The drive wheels the shift range. tion and deceleration. To do this,
could otherwise lock. the transmission will shift down one
Do not change down for additional or more gears.
Derestricting the shift range
engine braking on a slippery road
surface. This could cause the drive  Press and hold the selector lever to-
wheels to lose their grip and the ve- wards D+ until D is displayed once
more in the speedometer.
hicle could skid.
The transmission shifts from the
current shift range directly to D.
i
If you push the selector lever to-
wards D– while the vehicle is travel-
ling at too high a speed, the trans-
mission will not shift down. The
engine could overrev.

168 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

Shift ranges ê The transmission shifts all ç The transmission shifts


When the selector lever is in position D, five or seven gears in vehi- only as far as second gear.
you can restrict or derestrict the trans- cles with 7G-TRONIC. For braking on downhill
mission's shift range by pressing the
gradients and for driving
selector lever to the right towards D+ or ï Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC:
to the left towards D–. The transmission shifts  on steep mountain
only as far as sixth gear. roads
i  in mountainous terrain
When the maximum engine speed î Vehicles with 7G-TRONIC:
The transmission shifts  in arduous conditions
for the shift range is reached and
only as far as fifth gear.
you continue to accelerate, the æ The transmission works
transmission shifts up, even if the é The transmission shifts only in first gear.
shift range is restricted. only as far as fourth gear. For braking on extremely
steep downhill gradients
è The transmission shifts
only as far as third gear. and long downhill stretch-
es.
The braking effect of the
engine can be utilised in
this position.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 169


Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

The selected gearshift program


Program selector switch Driving tips
(C/S) is shown in the speedometer
The switch is located on the lower sec- ( page 166).
tion of the centre console. Accelerator pedal position
 Press program selector switch 1
Your style of driving influences how the
until the letter for the gearshift pro-
automatic transmission shifts gear:
gram you require appears in the
speedometer ( page 166). Little throttle early upshifts
P 27.60-2350-31
Select C for comfort mode. More throttle later upshifts
 The vehicle pulls away more
gently in forward and reverse Kickdown
gears. Use kickdown for maximum accelera-
This does not apply to full throt- tion.
tle.  Depress the accelerator pedal be-
 Traction is increased. This pro- yond the pressure point.
1 Program selector switch
vides improved driving stability The transmission shifts to a lower
S Standard For all normal driv- on slippery road surfaces, for gear.
ing conditions example.
 Release the accelerator pedal as
C Comfort For comfort mode  The transmission shifts up soon as the desired speed has been
sooner. This means that you reached.
! drive at lower engine speeds
Only press program selector and the wheels are less likely to The transmission shifts back up.
switch 1 when the selector lever is spin.
in position P, N or D.

170 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

Stopping Trailer towing Steering wheel gearshift


If you are only stopping briefly:  Drive in the middle of the engine buttons* and E 55 AMG
 Leave the selector lever in the drive speed range on uphill gradients. manual gearshift program*
position.  Shift down to shift range 3 or 2 de- The E 55 AMG can be driven in both the
 Prevent the vehicle from rolling
pending on the steepness of the up- automatic and manual gearshift pro-
away by applying the brake. hill gradient ( page 169), even if gram.
cruise control is activated.
Manoeuvring Steering wheel gearshift buttons
Working on the vehicle You can shift the gears using the steer-
If you are manoeuvring in a tight space:
ing wheel gearshift buttons or the se-
 Control the road speed by braking
carefully.
Risk of accident G lector lever. The steering wheel
gearshift buttons are on the right and
 Press the accelerator pedal careful- Apply the parking brake when work- left of the steering wheel.
ly. Avoid pressing the accelerator ing on the vehicle with the engine
pedal jerkily.
running, and move the selector lever
to position P. The vehicle could oth-
erwise roll away.
P27.60-2332-31

1 Left-hand button: to downshift


2 Right-hand button: to upshift

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 171


Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

i Downshifting i
You can always change gear using When the selector lever is at P, N or
the selector lever or the steering Risk of accident G R, you cannot change gear using the
wheel gearshift buttons. steering wheel gearshift buttons.
Do not change down for additional The next time you start the engine
Upshifting engine braking on a slippery sur- using the M manual gearshift pro-
 Press button 2 on the right of the face. The drive wheels could lose gram, the S automatic gearshift pro-
steering wheel. their grip on slippery surfaces and gram is activated. Otherwise, the
the vehicle could skid. most recently selected gearshift
The transmission shifts up to the program (C or S) is activated.
next gear. If you are not driving in
the manual drive program, this ex-  Press button 1 on the left of the
Manual gearshift program
tends the shift range ( page 169). steering wheel.
The transmission shifts down to the In the manual gearshift program, you
next gear. If you are not driving in can change gear yourself using the
the manual drive program, this lim- steering wheel gearshift buttons or the
its the shift range ( page 169). selector lever. To do this, you must
have previously selected the M manual
gearshift program using the program
selector switch.

172 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

The switch is located on the lower sec- Activating the manual gearshift !
tion of the centre console. program Warm up the engine quickly and do
 Press program selector switch 1 not drive at full power until it has
repeatedly until the letter M for the reached operating temperature.
manual gearshift program appears Only select reverse gear when the
in the speedometer. vehicle is stationary.
P27.60-2352-31 The automatic gearshift program Avoid prolonged spinning of a drive
changes to the M manual gearshift wheel when pulling away on a slip-
program. Automatic gearshifting is pery surface. You could otherwise
deactivated. The shift range is not damage the drive train.
restricted.
In selector lever position D, you can Upshifting
1 Program selector switch also change gear manually. You can
 Press the selector lever briefly to
shift up or down through the gears in
S Sport For all normal driv- the right towards D+.
sequence.
ing conditions or
The gear currently selected and en-
C Comfort For comfort mode  Press the button on the right of the
gaged is shown in the speedometer.
M MANUAL For manual gear- steering wheel ( page 171).
shifting The transmission shifts up to the
The selected gearshift program next gear.
(C/S/M) is shown in the speedometer
( page 166).

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 173


Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*

Downshifting Kickdown Deactivating the manual gear-


You can also use kickdown for maxi- shift program
Risk of accident G mum acceleration in the manual gear-  Press program selector switch 1
shift program. repeatedly until the letter C or S for
Do not change down for additional  Depress the accelerator pedal be- the automatic gearshift program
engine braking on a slippery sur- yond the pressure point. appears in the speedometer.
face. The drive wheels could lose The transmission shifts to a lower or
their grip on slippery surfaces and gear.  Start the engine again.
the vehicle could skid.  Shift back up when the desired Automatic gearshift program S is
speed has been reached. activated.
 Press the selector lever briefly to
the left towards D–. i
or If you apply full throttle, the trans-
mission shifts to the next gear up at
 Press the button on the left of the
maximum engine speed. If you
steering wheel ( page 171).
brake the vehicle or come to a halt,
The transmission shifts down to the the transmission shifts down to the
next gear. gear that will allow the vehicle to
accelerate or pull away most fa-
vourably.

174 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Good visibility
 Good visibility
You will find information about the
Mirrors
windscreen wipers and adjusting the Risk of accident G
mirrors in the "Getting started" section
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors*
( page 50). If the incident light from headlamps
The rear-view mirror and the driver's
cannot strike the sensor in the rear-
Headlamp cleaning system* side exterior mirror go into anti-dazzle
mode automatically if: view mirror, if the rear window
The switch is located in the cockpit be-
blind* is extended for instance, the
tween the steering wheel and the driv-  the ignition is switched on and
mirrors' automatic anti-dazzle func-
er's door.
 the incidental light from headlamps tion will not operate.
falls on the sensor in the rear-view
mirror Incident light could then dazzle you.
This may prevent you from observ-
The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle
ing the traffic conditions, thereby
P 54.25-2790-31 mode when:
causing an accident.
 reverse gear is engaged
 the interior lighting is switched on

1 To clean the headlamps


 Make sure that the ignition is
switched on.
 Briefly press button 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 175


Controls in detail
Good visibility

Rear-view mirror, manual anti- Folding the exterior mirrors in/


Risk of injury G dazzle out*
The button is located on the door con-
Electrolyte may escape if the glass trol panel.
in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror
breaks.
P68.00-2806-31
Electrolyte is an aggressive irritant
and must not be allowed to come
into contact with your skin, eyes or
respiratory organs. If electrolyte
comes into contact with your eyes
or skin, rinse thoroughly with clean P 88.70-2140-31
water immediately. Consult a doctor 1 Anti-dazzle lever
if necessary.  Press anti-dazzle lever 1 back.
The rear-view mirror goes into anti- 1 To fold the exterior mirrors in/out
! dazzle mode.  Make sure that the ignition is
If electrolyte drips onto the vehi- switched on.
cle's paintwork, immediately rinse
the paintwork thoroughly with clean Folding in
water. Otherwise it could damage  Press button 1.
the paintwork. The two exterior mirrors fold in.
Electrolyte can only be rinsed off
before it has dried. Folding out
 Press button 1.
The two exterior mirrors fold out.

176 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Good visibility

Folding the exterior mirrors in/ You can only use this parking aid if you  Make sure that the ignition is
out automatically have previously stored the parking posi- switched on.
tion for the exterior mirror on the front-  Make sure that the Mirror ad-
If the relevant function is activated in
passenger side using the memory func- justment parking aid func-
the operating system ( page 156):
tion ( page 120). tion in the Convenience sub-
 the exterior mirrors fold in automat-
The buttons are on the door control menu is switched on ( page 155).
ically as soon as you lock the vehi-
panel.  Press button 2 for the exterior mir-
cle from the outside
ror on the front-passenger side.
 the exterior mirrors fold out again
automatically as soon as you un-  Engage reverse gear.
lock the vehicle and then open the The exterior mirror on the front-pas-
driver's or front-passenger door E2_F1 senger side moves to the stored
parking position.
i B13_P88.70-2270-31
The exterior mirror on the front-passen-
The mirrors do not fold out if they
ger side moves back to its original posi-
were previously folded in manually.
tion:

Parking aid*  as soon as you exceed a speed of


5 mph (10 km/h)
To make it easier to park, the exterior 1 Driver's exterior mirror
2 Exterior mirror on the front-passen-  about ten seconds after reverse
mirror on the front-passenger side
moves into the parking position as soon ger side gear is deselected
as you engage reverse gear. This allows  if you press button 1 for the driv-
you to observe the kerb on the front- er's exterior mirror
passenger side.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 177


Controls in detail
Good visibility

Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from glare as
you are driving. P 68.00-2816-31
P 68.00-2818-31
Risk of accident G
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors
covered while driving. Dazzling light
could otherwise endanger yourself
and others. Sun visor 1 Retainer
2 Additional visor*
1 Sun visor 3 Sun visor
2 Mirror cover
3 Lighting* i
4 Vanity mirror If the sun is dazzling you from the
 Fold sun visor 1 down if you are side, you can pull the visor out of re-
being dazzled. tainer 1, fold it to the side and
 Make sure that sun visor 1 is en- slide it backwards and forwards*.
gaged in the retainer.
 Lift up mirror cover 2 if you re-
quire the mirror.
The lighting switches on.

178 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Good visibility

Rear window blind* !


The rear window blind protects you Make sure that the rear window
P 68.00-2817-31 from glare and heat radiation. blind can move freely. Otherwise
the blind or objects could be dam-
Extending/retracting the rear aged.
window blind
Extending
The button is located on the centre con-
sole.  Press switch 1.
The blind extends fully.
1 Additional visor*
P 54.25-3160-31
Retracting
 Press switch 1.
The blind retracts fully.

1 To extend/retract

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 179


Controls in detail
Good visibility

Roller sunblinds* for the rear Rear window heating Switching on


side window The rear window heating switches off  Press the F button on the con-
automatically within a period of 6 to trol panel:
more than 20 minutes. The heating time  Thermatic ( page 183)
depends on the outside temperature
 Thermotronic* ( page 194).
P67.30-2087-31 and the driving conditions.
The indicator lamp in the button
lights up.
Risk of accident G
 Pull the roller sunblind out by the Switching off
Clear all windows of ice or snow be-
catch.  Press the F button on the con-
fore setting off. Impaired visibility
 Hook the catch in at the top. trol panel again:
could otherwise endanger yourself
and others.  Thermatic ( page 183)
!
Always guide the blind manually. Do  Thermotronic* ( page 194).
not let it snap back suddenly. You The indicator lamp in the button
could otherwise damage the auto- goes out.
matic roller mechanism.

180 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Thermatic
 Thermatic

E2_F1
B13+1_P83.30-3861-31

1 Thermatic control panel 5 Centre air vent thumbwheel 9 Thumbwheel for adding cold
6 Side air vent thumbwheel air
2 Swivelling centre air vent, left
7 Demister vent a Centre air vent thumbwheel
3 Air vent
4 Swivelling centre air vent, 8 Swivelling side air vent
right

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 181


Controls in detail
Thermatic

i
Risk of injury G Position the sliders for the centre
and side air vents in the central po-
When Thermatic is in operation, very sition to provide virtually draught-
hot or very cold air can flow from the free ventilation.
vents. This could cause burns or
frostbite to bare skin in the immedi-
ate vicinity of the vents. Keep bare
skin away from these air outlets. If
necessary, use the air-distribution
control to direct the airflow away to
a different area of the vehicle interi-
or.

182 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Thermatic

E2_F1
B13+2_P83.30-3862-31

1 Temperature, left 8 Cooling off e Automatic air distribution


(no electric heater booster*) and airflow
2 Demists the windows
9 Air-distribution display
3 Increases the airflow
a Thermatic on/off
4 Air distribution
b Airflow display
5 Rear window heating
( page 180) c Reduces the airflow
6 Temperature, right d Air-recirculation mode
7 Residual heat

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 183


Controls in detail
Thermatic

Thermatic is only operational when the Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
i
engine is running. Optimum operation during warm weather, e.g. using the
is only achieved when you are driving The interval for replacing the filter summer opening feature ( page 221).
with the windows and sliding/tilting depends on environmental influ- This helps to achieve the required inte-
sunroof* closed. ences such as heavy air pollution. rior temperature more quickly.
The interval may be shorter than
You can allow the air-conditioning sys- that indicated in the Service Book- Observe the following notes to ensure
tem to adjust automatically let. A damaged filter reduces the that Thermatic functions correctly:
( page 185) or you can adjust it man- amount of air supplied to the vehi-  Keep the air inlet between the bon-
ually ( page 186). cle interior. net and windscreen free of depos-
In automatic mode, Thermatic cools or its, e.g. ice or snow, to guarantee
heats the vehicle interior depending on Using the residual heat function, the ve- the supply of fresh air into the vehi-
the: hicle interior can continue to be heated cle interior.
 selected temperature up when the engine is switched off.  Never cover the vents or air inlet
 outside temperature and outlet grilles in the vehicle inte-
rior.
 sunlight
You only rarely need to adjust the tem-
perature, airflow and air distribution
when automatic mode is set.
The integrated combination filter large-
ly filters out particles of dust and com-
pletely filters out pollen.

184 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Thermatic

Activating and deactivating Controlling the air


Risk of accident G Thermatic conditioning automatically
Follow the settings recommended Deactivating Activating
on the following pages for heating or
 Press the M switch.  Briefly press the U switch with
cooling. The windows could other-
the engine running.
wise mist up. This may prevent you !
from observing the traffic condi- The indicator lamp in the switch
Air supply and air circulation are
comes on. The temperature, airflow
tions, thereby causing an accident. also switched off if Thermatic is de-
and air distribution are controlled
activated. Only use these settings
automatically.
for a brief period. The windows
 Set the required temperature for
Environmental note H could otherwise mist up.
the driver's and the front-passenger
Activating sides separately using the tempera-
The cooling system uses the refrig- ture control ( page 183).
erant R134A. This refrigerant does  Press the M switch.
The vehicle interior temperature is
not damage the earth's ozone layer.
i adjusted automatically.
You can also press any of the other
Thermatic switches to activate the
system.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 185


Controls in detail
Thermatic

Deactivating Reducing the temperature Setting the air distribution


 Press the U switch.  Turn the temperature control anti- manually
The indicator lamp in the switch clockwise. The air distribution for the entire vehicle
goes out. The automatic control for Thermatic adjusts to the set tem- can be set automatically using the U
the temperature, airflow and air dis- perature. switch ( page 183) or manually by
tribution is deactivated. pressing air-distribution rocker switch
Adjusting the temperature for 4 ( page 183).
You can now set the air distribution
( page 186) and the airflow the centre air vents The symbols on air-distribution display
( page 187) manually. You can reduce the temperature for the 9 have the following meanings:
centre air vents. Thumbwheel 9 for the
Setting the temperature temperature is located between the Symbol Meaning
The temperature can be set separately centre air vents ( page 181). Ô Directs air to the wind-
for each side of the vehicle using tem- screen and through the
 Turn the thumbwheel ( page 181)
perature controls 1 and 6 centre and side air vents
downwards.
( page 183).
Õ Directs air through the
Vary the temperature settings in small i centre and side air vents
increments only. 22°C is the ideal tem- Temperature adjustment is only
perature to start with. Ò Directs air to the wind-
possible in manual mode. screen, into the footwell
and through the centre
Increasing the temperature
and side air vents
 Turn the temperature control clock-
Ó Directs air into the foot-
wise.
well and through the cen-
Thermatic adjusts to the set tem- tre and side air vents
perature.

186 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Thermatic

 Press the lower or upper section of


Setting the airflow manually Demisting
air-distribution rocker switch 4 un-
til air-distribution display 9 shows You can set the airflow automatically You can use the following settings to
the symbol you require. ( page 185) or manually using the demist the windscreen, e.g. when it is
Q and  switches on nine levels. covered with frost.
The indicator lamp in the U
switch goes out.
Activating Activating
Automatic air distribution is deacti-
vated. The air distribution is con-  Press the Q switch. The airflow  Press the P switch.
trolled in accordance with the is increased. The indicator lamp in the switch
selected setting. or comes on.
 Press the  switch. The airflow Thermatic automatically switches
Setting the air distribution for is reduced. on the following functions:
the centre air vents
The indicator lamp in the U  Maximum blower and heater
You can set optimum air distribution for switch goes out. The automatic air- output
the vehicle interior. flow control is deactivated. The air-  Air to the windscreen and front
 Turn centre air vent thumbwheel a flow is controlled in accordance side windows
on the left and 5 on the right with the selected level. Airflow dis-
( page 181) until they engage. play b indicates the level which
Deactivating
has been set.
Air vent 3 and swivelling centre air
 Press the P switch.
vents 2 and 4 are fully open.
The indicator lamp in the switch
goes out.
The previously selected setting is
reset.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 187


Controls in detail
Thermatic

Windows misted up Air-recirculation mode Activating


 Switch on the windscreen wipers You can switch off the flow of fresh air  Press the Ð switch.
( page 50). if unpleasant smells are entering the ve- The indicator lamp in the switch
 Close the air vent at the top of the hicle from outside. No more fresh air comes on.
cockpit. will be taken in and the air inside the ve-
 Make sure that automatic mode is
hicle will be recirculated. i
switched on ( page 185). Air-recirculation mode is switched

The indicator lamp in the U Risk of accident G on automatically at high outside


temperatures.
switch is lit.
Only switch over to air-recirculation When air-recirculation mode is acti-
i mode briefly if the outside tempera- vated automatically, the indicator
The air distribution in automatic ture is below 5 °C. Otherwise the lamp in the Ð switch is not lit.
mode is controlled in such a way windows could mist up, thus impair- Outside air is added after about
that the windows cannot usually ing visibility and endangering your- 30 minutes.
mist up. self and others. This may prevent
you from observing the traffic condi- Deactivating
tions, thereby causing an accident.  Press the Ð switch.
The indicator lamp in the switch
goes out.

188 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Thermatic

i i
Air-recirculation mode switches off
Risk of accident G If you open a window or the
automatically: sliding/tilting sunroof* manually
Make sure that nobody can be after closing using the convenience
 after approximately five min- trapped as you close the sliding/ closing feature, they will remain in
utes at outside temperatures
tilting sunroof* or the side windows. this position when opened using
below approximately 5 °C
To halt the closing procedure and the convenience opening feature.
 after approximately five min-
utes if the cooling function is open the sliding/tilting sunroof*,
switched off ( page 190) press the roof switch in the appro- Residual heat
priate direction ( page 213). When you have switched off the engine,
 after approximately 30 minutes
at outside temperatures above you can still heat the stationary vehicle
approximately 5 °C Deactivating/opening for up to 30 minutes using residual
heat.
 Press and hold the Ð switch for
Air-recirculation mode with con- more than two seconds. i
venience opening/closing fea- The indicator lamp in the switch The heating period depends on:
ture goes out. The side windows and the
 the interior temperature set on
sliding/tilting sunroof* move back
the control panel ( page 183)
Activating/closing to the previous positions. Air-recir-
culation mode is deactivated.  the coolant temperature
 Press and hold the Ð switch for
more than two seconds. The blower will run at a lower speed
regardless of the airflow setting.
The indicator lamp in the switch
comes on. The side windows and
the sliding/tilting sunroof* close.
Air-recirculation mode is activated.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 189


Controls in detail
Thermatic

Activating i
 Make sure that Thermatic is set to Residual heat is switched off auto-
Risk of accident G
automatic mode. matically:
If you switch off the cooling func-
 Switch off the ignition.  when you switch on the ignition tion, the vehicle will not be cooled in
 Press the T switch.  after about 30 minutes hot weather conditions. The win-
The indicator lamp in the switch  if the battery voltage drops dows could mist up more quickly.
comes on. This may prevent you from observ-
 if the coolant temperature is
too low ing the traffic conditions, thereby
Deactivating causing an accident.
 Press the T switch.
Activating/deactivating the
The indicator lamp in the switch Deactivating
cooling function
goes out. You can deactivate the cooling. The air
The cooling function is operational
when the engine is running and cools in the vehicle will not then be cooled or
depending on the interior temperature dehumidified.
selected. The cooling also dries the air  Press the ACOFF switch.
inside the vehicle and thereby effective- The indicator lamp in the switch
ly prevents the windows from misting comes on.
up.
The heater booster system*
( page 206) is deactivated.

190 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Thermatic

Activating The rear air vents are located on the Setting the air distribution
rear centre console.
The windows may mist up if the air is  Push the slider for the left or right
humid. The cooling function can be centre air vent to the left, right, up
used to dehumidify the air. or down.
 Press the ACOFF switch. The airflow is directed in the corre-
The indicator lamp in the switch sponding direction.
goes out.
i
Rear-compartment air P 83.00-2080-31 Position the sliders for the rear air
conditioning vents in the upper position to pro-
vide draught-free ventilation.
Air conditioning in the rear compart-
ment is controlled via the control panel
for the automatic air conditioning Rear air vents
Setting the airflow
( page 183).  Turn thumbwheel 3 or thumb-
1 Swivelling centre air vent, left
You can set the airflow and air direction wheel 4 upwards or downwards.
2 Swivelling centre air vent, right
individually using the rear vents. 3 Centre air vent thumbwheel, right The airflow is increased or reduced.
4 Centre air vent thumbwheel, left
i
The temperature of the air from the
rear-compartment centre air vents
is the same as the temperature of
the air from the centre air vents in
the cockpit.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 191


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

E2_F1
B13+3_P83.30-3863-31

1 Thermotronic control panel 5 Centre air vent thumbwheel 9 Thumbwheel for adding
6 Side air vent thumbwheel cold air
2 Swivelling centre air vent, left
7 Demister vent a Centre air vent thumbwheel
3 Air vent
4 Swivelling centre air vent, 8 Swivelling side air vent
right

192 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

P 83.00-2065-31 Risk of injury G


When 4-zone Thermotronic* is in
operation, very hot or very cold air
can flow from the vents. This could
cause burns or frostbite to bare skin
in the immediate vicinity of the
vents. Keep bare skin away from
these air outlets. If necessary, use
the air-distribution control to direct
the airflow away to a different area
of the vehicle interior.
1 Side air vent thumbwheel
2 Swivelling side air vent

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 193


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

E2_F1
B13+4_P83.30-3864-31

1 Air distribution, left 8 Automatic air distribution e Cooling off (no electric heater
and airflow, right booster*)
2 Demists the windows
9 Activated charcoal filter Residual heat
3 Temperature, left
a Rear-compartment air-condi- f Air-recirculation mode
4 Display
tioning remote control g Automatic air distribution
5 Temperature, right and airflow, left
b Increases the airflow
6 Rear window heating
c Thermotronic on/off
( page 180)
d Reduces the airflow
7 Air distribution, right

194 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

Thermotronic is only operational when The interior temperature for each of the
the engine is running. Optimum opera- four zones can be set separately
tion is only achieved when you are driv- ( page 198).
ing with the windows and sliding/tilting A solar sensor allows Thermotronic to
sunroof* closed. P 83.00-2070-31 detect the position of the sun and auto-
You can allow the air-conditioning sys- matically regulate the interior tempera-
tem to adjust automatically ture in each of the four zones.
( page 197) or you can adjust it man- The integrated combination filter filters
ually ( page 198). out the following completely:
In automatic mode, Thermotronic cools  particles of dust down to a certain
or heats the vehicle interior in accord- size
ance with the:
 pollen
 selected temperature
 outside temperature
 sunlight
Thermotronic is a 4-zone intelligent air-
conditioning system. The vehicle interi-
or is divided into four zones.

The four air-conditioning zones of


4-zone Thermotronic

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 195


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

The activated charcoal filter, which may


i
also be switched on manually, largely
Please observe the following notes
Risk of accident G
filters out pollutants and odours.
to ensure that Thermotronic func-
Follow the settings recommended
i tions correctly:
on the following pages for heating or
The interval for replacing the filter  Keep the air inlet between the
cooling. The windows could other-
depends on environmental influ- bonnet and windscreen free of
wise mist up. This may prevent you
ences such as strong air pollution. deposits, e.g. ice and snow, to
guarantee the supply of fresh from observing the traffic condi-
The interval may be shorter than
that indicated in the Service Book- air into the vehicle interior. tions, thereby causing an accident.
let. A damaged filter reduces the  Never cover the vents or venti-
amount of air supplied to the vehi- lation grilles in the vehicle inte- i
cle interior. rior. Condensation may drip from the
You can store the Thermotronic set- underside of the vehicle when it is
Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
tings so that they are key-depend- in cooling mode.
during warm weather, e.g. using the
ent ( page 155).
summer opening feature ( page 221).
This helps you to achieve the required
interior temperature more quickly. Environmental note H
The cooling system uses the refrig-
erant R134A. This refrigerant does
not damage the earth's ozone layer.

196 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

Activating and deactivating Controlling the air Activating


4-zone Thermotronic conditioning automatically  Press one of the U switches
You can switch the automatic air-condi- with the engine running.
Deactivating tioning control on or off separately for The indicator lamp in the U
 Press the M switch. each zone as required. switch comes on. The AUTO display
in the control panel comes on. The
! i airflow and air distribution are auto-
Air supply and air circulation are If you switch on the automatic air matically controlled separately for
also switched off if Thermotronic is conditioning, you only rarely need each zone.
deactivated. This setting should be to adjust the temperature, airflow
selected for a limited period only, or air distribution.
otherwise the windows may mist The cooling/air dehumidification
up. function is switched on in automat- P83.40-2344
ic mode. This function can be
Activating switched off as required
 Press the M switch. ( page 203).
Control panel display
i
1 Temperature, left
You can also press any of the other
2 AUTO function activated
Thermatic switches to activate the
3 Temperature, right
system.
4 Automatically-preset levels 

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 197


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

 Set the required temperature for Reducing the temperature


Setting the temperature
the driver's and the front-passenger
The temperature can be set for each  Press the lower section of the tem-
sides separately using the tempera-
zone using temperature rocker switch- perature rocker switch until the re-
ture control ( page 194).
es 3 and 5 and switch a quired temperature appears in the
The vehicle interior temperature is ( page 194). control panel display.
adjusted automatically.
Vary the temperature settings in small 4-zone Thermotronic adjusts to the
increments only. 22 °C is the ideal tem- set temperature.
Deactivating
perature to start with.
 Press one of the U switches Adjusting the temperature for
( page 194). Increasing the temperature the centre air vents
The indicator lamp in the switch  Press the upper section of the tem- You can increase or reduce the temper-
goes out. The automatic control for perature rocker switch until the re- ature for the centre air vents.
the airflow and air distribution is de- quired temperature appears in the
activated. control panel display. Reducing the temperature
You can now set the air distribution 4-zone Thermotronic adjusts to the  Turn thumbwheel 9 between the
( page 199) and the airflow set temperature. centre air vents upwards.
( page 200) manually. ( page 192).
Cooler air flows out of the centre air
vents.

198 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

Increasing the temperature The symbols on the air-distribution dis-  Turn thumbwheels 1 and 7 to the
play have the following meanings: appropriate symbol ( page 194).
 Turn thumbwheel 9 between the
centre air vents downwards. The indicator lamp in the U
( page 192). Symbol Meaning switch goes out. Automatic air dis-
Ô Directs air to the tribution is switched off. The air dis-
Warmer air flows out of the centre
windscreen and tribution is controlled depending on
air vents.
through the side air the position of the selected thumb-
i vents wheel.
Temperature adjustment is only Õ Directs air through the
possible in manual mode. centre and side air
vents
Setting the air distribution Ò Directs air to the
manually windscreen, into the
footwell and through
The air distribution can be set separate-
the centre and side air
ly for each side automatically using the
vents
U switch or manually using the
thumbwheel ( page 194). Ó Directs air into the
footwell and through
the side air vents

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 199


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

Setting the airflow manually Demisting Deactivating


You can set the airflow automatically You can use the following settings to  Press the P switch again.
( page 197) or manually using the demist the windscreen, e.g. when it is The indicator lamp in the switch
Q and  switches on nine levels. covered with frost. goes out. The previously selected
When you set the airflow manually, the setting is reset.
AUTO display on the control panel goes Activating
out. The automatic airflow control is de-  Press the P switch. Windows misted up
activated. The airflow is controlled de- If the blower is switched off and the air-
The indicator lamp in the switch
pending on the position of the selected recirculation mode is switched on, the
comes on.
thumbwheel. vehicle interior will no longer be venti-
Thermotronic automatically switch-
lated and the windows could mist up.
Increasing the airflow es on the following functions:
 Switch on the windscreen wipers
 Press the Q switch.  Maximum blower and heater
( page 50).
output
 Make sure that the automatic mode
Reducing the airflow  Air flows to the windscreen and
is switched on for both sides
the front side windows
 Press the  switch. ( page 197).

i i The indicator lamps in the U


You should only retain this setting switches are lit.
Now you can also set the air distri-
until the windscreen is cleared
bution manually ( page 199). i
again.
The air distribution in automatic
mode is controlled in such a way
that the windows cannot usually
mist up.

200 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

Air-recirculation mode i Air-recirculation mode with con-


Air-recirculation mode is activated venience opening/closing fea-
You can switch off the flow of fresh air
if unpleasant smells are entering the ve- automatically at high outside tem- ture
hicle from outside. No more fresh air peratures.
will be taken in and the air inside the ve- Activating/closing
Outside air is added after about
hicle will be recirculated. 30 minutes.  Press and hold the Ð switch for
more than two seconds.
Risk of accident G Deactivating The indicator lamp in the switch
 Press the Ð switch. comes on. The side windows and
Only switch over to air-recirculation the sliding/tilting sunroof* close.
The indicator lamp in the switch Air-recirculation mode is activated.
mode briefly if the outside tempera- goes out.
ture is below 5 °C. The windows
could otherwise mist up. This may i Risk of accident G
prevent you from observing the traf- Air-recirculation mode switches off
fic conditions, thereby causing an automatically: Make sure that nobody can be
accident.  after approximately 30 minutes trapped as you close the sliding/
at outside temperatures above tilting sunroof* or the side windows.
Activating approximately 5 °C  To halt the closing procedure
 Press the Ð switch.  after approximately five min- and open the sliding/tilting
utes at outside temperatures sunroof*, press the roof switch
The indicator lamp in the switch
below approximately 5 °C in the appropriate direction
comes on.
( page 213).
 after approximately five min-
utes if the cooling function is
switched off ( page 203)

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 201


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

Deactivating/opening Activated charcoal filter with Activating


 Press and hold the Ð switch for pollutant-sensitive air-recircula-  Press the e switch.
more than two seconds. tion mode
The indicator lamp in the switch
The indicator lamp in the switch The activated charcoal filter reduces comes on. The activated charcoal
goes out. The side windows and the pollutants and odours in the outside air. filter is activated.
sliding/tilting sunroof* move back You can activate and deactivate the ac-
to the previous position. Air-recir- tivated charcoal filter as required. Deactivating
culation mode is deactivated. Thermotronic automatically switches to  Press the e switch.
air-recirculation mode if:
i The indicator lamp in the switch
 the activated charcoal filter is acti- goes out. The activated charcoal fil-
If you open a window or the
vated ter is deactivated.
sliding/tilting sunroof* manually
after closing using the convenience  specific values for carbon monox-
closing feature, they will remain in ide or nitrogen oxide are exceeded Residual heat
this position when opened using in the outside air When you have switched off the engine,
the convenience opening feature. you can still heat the stationary vehicle
i for up to 30 minutes using residual
Pollutant-sensitive air-recirculation heat.
mode is not available if you have
deactivated the cooling function
( page 203) or the outside temper-
ature has fallen below 5 °C.

202 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

i i Activating/deactivating the
The heating period depends on: Residual heat is switched off auto- cooling function
 the interior temperature set on matically: The cooling function is operational
the control panel ( page 194) when the engine is running and cools
 when you switch on the ignition
depending on the interior temperature
 the coolant temperature  after about 30 minutes selected. The cooling also dries the air
The blower will run at a lower speed  if the battery voltage drops inside the vehicle and thereby effective-
regardless of the airflow setting. ly prevents the windows from misting
up.
Activating
 Switch off the ignition. Risk of accident G
 Press the T switch.
If you switch off the cooling, the ve-
The indicator lamp in the switch
comes on. hicle will not be cooled in hot weath-
er conditions. The windows could
Deactivating mist up more quickly. This may pre-
vent you from observing the traffic
 Press the T switch.
conditions, thereby causing an acci-
The indicator lamp in the switch dent.
goes out.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 203


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

Deactivating control panel. Further information


Rear-compartment air
about the front control panel can be
You can switch off the cooling. The air conditioning
found from page 194 onwards.
in the vehicle will not then be cooled or
dehumidified.
Setting the temperature
 Press the ACOFF switch.
Set the temperature in the rear com-
The indicator lamp in the switch partment separately for the right and
comes on. The cooling function is left-hand sides using rocker switches
deactivated. The heater booster P 83.30-3670-31 4 and 6.
system* ( page 206) is deactivat-
ed.

Activating
The windows may mist up if the air is Rear-compartment Thermotronic P83.50-2054
humid. The cooling function can be control panel
used to dehumidify the air.
1 Swivelling centre air vent, left
 Press the ACOFF switch. Display
2 Swivelling centre air vent, right
The indicator lamp in the switch 3 Centre air vent thumbwheel, right 1 Temperature display, left
goes out. The cooling function is ac- 4 Temperature, right 2 Temperature display, right
tivated. 5 Display
6 Temperature, left i
7 Centre air vent thumbwheel, left Mercedes-Benz recommends that
You can set the rear-compartment air you set the temperature to 22 °C
conditioning using the rear-compart- for both the left and right-hand
ment control panel in exactly the same sides.
way as you would set it using the front

204 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
4-zone Thermotronic*

i Setting the airflow  Set the rear-compartment tempera-


ture separately for the left and
The rear-compartment air condition-  Turn the thumbwheel up or down to
right-hand sides using temperature
ing does not cool the air if the cool- set the required airflow
rocker switches 3 and 5
ing function in the automatic air ( page 204).
( page 194).
conditioning has been switched off
on the front control panel Controlling the rear-compart- The display changes back to the
( page 203). ment air conditioning from the standard display about five seconds
after a switch was last pressed.
The heater booster system* front
( page 206) is then also switched You can also control the rear-compart- i
off. ment air conditioning using the control You can also return to the standard
panel in the centre console. display by pressing the ™ switch
Setting the air distribution again.
 Press the ™ switch.
 Push the slider for the left or right
The display switches over.
centre air vent ( page 204) to the
left, right, up or down.
The airflow is directed in the corre-
sponding direction.
P83.40-2345
i
Position the sliders for the rear-
compartment air vents in the upper 1 Rear-compartment remote control
position to provide draught-free activated
ventilation.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 205


Controls in detail
Heater booster system* on vehicles with a diesel engine

Your vehicle is equipped with a heater i


booster system. A PTC heating element
If ACOFF economy mode is activat-
ensures that the vehicle interior is heat-
ed, the PTC heating element is not
ed up as quickly as possible during the
switched on.
warm-up phase.
The heater booster system switches it-
self on as required.

206 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Auxiliary heating/ventilation*
 Auxiliary heating/ventilation*
The auxiliary heating/ventilation heats The auxiliary heating switches off auto-
or ventilates the vehicle interior accord- Risk of fire and poisoning G matically after a maximum of 50 min-
ing to the values you have set on the air- utes. You can have this time changed.
conditioning control panel, and the inte- Do not switch on the auxiliary heat- Visit a qualified specialist workshop,
rior temperature. You can set up to ing: e.g. the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service
three switch-on times using the operat- Centre.
ing system.  at the filling station
 in confined spaces without an i
You can activate and deactivate the
auxiliary heating/ventilation: extraction system, e.g. in the ga- The auxiliary heating/ventilation
rage ventilates the vehicle interior before
 the switch on the centre console heating it, depending on the temper-
Otherwise you could endanger your-
 the remote control ature and conditions. This ensures
self and others. that the required temperature is
and
achieved more quickly.
 the preset time function
i
Safe operation of the auxiliary heat- Before activating
ing can no longer be guaranteed if  You should preferably set the air
the reserve fuel level is reached and conditioning to U.
the reserve fuel warning lamp in the
We recommend that you set the tem-
instrument cluster lights up
perature to 22 °C for both the left and
( page 400).
right-hand sides.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation regu-
lates the set temperatures automatical-
ly.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 207


Controls in detail
Auxiliary heating/ventilation*

i  transmitting from an enclosed


Activated
space
The auxiliary heating/ventilation Blue Auxiliary ventilation
can also be activated manually. i
Optimum comfort can only be ob- Red Auxiliary heating
For each vehicle, one additional re-
tained by using the U setting. Yellow Auxiliary heating/ mote control of the same configura-
ventilation preset time tion may be used. Any Mercedes-
Activating  Press and hold switch 1 for at Benz Service Centre can provide you
least two seconds. with details.
Switch on the centre console
The red or the blue indicator lamp in
the switch lights up.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation is
activated.
P83.70-3902-31
P 54.25-3161-31 Remote control
The remote control has a maximum
range of approximately 300 m.
External influences may reduce the
range of the remote control. These in-
clude:
 sources of radio interference 1 Indicator lamp
1 To switch the auxiliary heating/
2 OFF
ventilation on/off  solid objects between the transmit- 3 ON
The indicator lamps in the switch may ter and the vehicle
light up in blue, red or yellow.  the remote control being in an unfa-
vourable position in relation to the
vehicle or

208 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Auxiliary heating/ventilation*

 Press the ON button until green in- Activating the timer function de P54.30-5354-31
dicator lamp 1 in the remote con- en P 54.30-5403-31
The multi-function display can be used
trol lights up.
to set three auxiliary heating/ventila- fr P 54.30-5449-31
The red or the blue indicator lamp in tion switch-on times, only one of which
it P 54.30-5495-31
the switch on the centre console can be activated at any one time.
goes out. sp P 54.30-5541-31
Setting the switch-on time  Press the æ or ç button re-
Deactivating
 Press the è or ÿ switch on peatedly until Heater is highlight-
Switch on the centre console the multi-function steering wheel ed.
repeatedly until the Settings
 Press and hold the switch for more main menu appears.  Press the j or k button re-
than two seconds. peatedly until the Auxiliary
The red or the blue indicator lamp in de P54.30-5353-31 heating menu is highlighted.
the switch goes out. en P 54.30-5402-31
de P54.30-5355-31
The auxiliary heating/ventilation is fr P 54.30-5448-31
en P 54.30-5404-31
deactivated. it P 54.30-5494-31 fr P 54.30-5450-31
sp P 54.30-5540-31 it P 54.30-5496-31
Remote control
 Press the j or k button on sp P 54.30-5542-31
 Press the OFF button until indicator
the multi-function steering wheel
lamp 1 lights up red.
repeatedly until the Settings  Press the æ or ç button re-
The red or the blue indicator lamp in submenu appears. peatedly until a switch-on time (e.g.
the switch on the centre console Time 1) is highlighted.
goes out.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation is
deactivated.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 209


Controls in detail
Auxiliary heating/ventilation*

 Press the j or k button re-  Press the æ or ç button re- Select the time at which the auxilia-
peatedly until the Switch-on peatedly until the required minutes ry heating/ventilation is to switch
time Set hours menu appears. have been set. on using the æ or ç button.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation If you select:
de P54.30-5356-31
en PP 54.30-5405-31 switch-on time has been set and se-  a time – the switch-on time is
lected. selected
fr P 54.30-5451-31
The yellow indicator lamp in the  Timer off – the automatic
it P 54.30-5497-31 switch on the centre console lights switch-on time is deactivated
sp P 54.30-5543-31 up. When the auxiliary heating/
ventilation is activated, the yellow Solar module*
 Press the æ or ç button re- indicator lamp goes out and the red A solar module is also available in con-
peatedly until the required hours or the blue indicator lamp lights up. junction with the panorama sliding sun-
have been set. roof*. The electrical energy collected
 Press the j or k button re- Calling up the switch-on time by this module drives the air-condition-
peatedly until the Switch-on ing ventilation blowers which, providing
 Call up the Auxiliary heating
time Set minutes menu ap- a constant airflow rate, ensure a pleas-
switch-on time menu.
pears. ant temperature and fresh air in the ve-
The current setting is highlighted. hicle interior after the engine has been
de P54.30-5357-31 turned off.
en P 54.30-5406-31 Activating the timer function The airflow rate depends on the
fr P 54.30-5452-31  Call up the Auxiliary heating strength of the sun's rays; ventilation
it P 54.30-5498-31 menu. usually starts approximately two min-
sp P 54.30-5544-31 utes after the ignition has been
switched off.

210 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Open-air
 Open-air
Opening and closing the Never leave children alone in the ve- Activate the child-proof locks in the
windows hicle even if they are secured in a rear doors ( page 73), deactivate
You can open and close the side win- child restraint system. The children the rear-compartment control of the
dows electrically. could: rear side windows ( page 75) and
 injure themselves on parts of remove the cigarette lighter if chil-
Risk of injury G the vehicle dren are travelling in the vehicle.
The children could otherwise open
 be severely or fatally harmed if
Make sure that nobody can be doors or windows while you are driv-
they are left in the vehicle for a
trapped as you close a side window. long period while it is hot ing or push the cigarette lighter in
If danger threatens, release the and thereby injure themselves or
 press the central locking button
switch or press the switch again to others.
and thereby deactivate the
open the side windows again. child-proof locks and open the
Your vehicle can be started using a door i
valid KEYLESS GO key. For this rea- If the children open the door, they The side windows can also be:
son, children should never be left could:  opened from the outside using
unsupervised in the vehicle. Always the "summer opening" feature
 injure other people
take the KEYLESS GO key with you ( page 221)
when leaving the vehicle, even if you  get out of the vehicle and there-
by injure themselves or be in-  closed from the outside using
are only leaving it for a short time.
jured by the traffic approaching the "convenience closing fea-
from the rear ture" ( page 221)
You can disable control of the rear
side windows from the driver's seat
( page 75).

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 211


Controls in detail
Open-air

The switches for all side windows are lo- i Opening a side window fully
cated on the driver's door. There is also
You can still operate the windows if  Push switch 1, 2, 3 or 4 be-
a switch on each door for the corre-
the key is in position 0 in the igni- yond the pressure point and then
sponding side window.
tion lock or has been removed: release the switch.
 until the driver's door or the
front-passenger door is opened Stopping a side window
 for a maximum of 5 minutes  Briefly press switch 1, 2, 3 or
P 54.25-2614-31
4.
Opening a side window
Closing a side window fully
 Press and hold switch 1, 2, 3 or
4 until the corresponding window  Pull and hold switch 1, 2, 3 or
has reached the required position. 4 beyond the pressure point and
then release the switch.
Closing a side window
Switches on the driver's door Stopping a side window
 Pull and hold switch 1, 2, 3 or
1 Front left 4 until the corresponding window  Briefly press switch 1, 2, 3 or
2 Front right has reached the required position. 4.
3 Rear right
4 Rear left
 Make sure that the ignition is
switched on.

212 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Open-air

Resetting the side windows Sliding/tilting sunroof*


The side windows must be reset if the Risk of injury G
battery has been disconnected or has
become discharged.
Risk of injury G Your vehicle can be started using a
valid KEYLESS GO key*. For this rea-
i Make sure that nobody can become
son, children should never be left
trapped when closing the sliding/
You must reset each side window unsupervised in the vehicle. Always
separately. tilting sunroof. If danger threatens,
take the KEYLESS GO key* with you
release the switch and push the
when leaving the vehicle, even if you
 Switch on the ignition. opening switch.
are only leaving it for a short time.
 Pull and hold switch 1, 2, 3 or
4 until the window is closed and
hold down the switch for about a Risk of injury G !
second. Only open the sliding/tilting sun-
The glass in the sliding/tilting sun- roof if it is free of snow and ice. Oth-
roof could smash in an accident. erwise malfunctions may occur.

If you are not wearing a seat belt, Do not allow sharp-edged objects
to protrude from the sliding/tilting
there is a danger of being thrown
sunroof as they could damage the
through the opening in the event of
sealing strips.
the vehicle overturning. Therefore,
always wear a seat belt to reduce
the risk of injuries.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 213


Controls in detail
Open-air

i Opening and closing the sliding/ Opening


tilting sunroof  Press and hold the switch in the di-
When the sliding sunroof is open,
resonance noises may occur as well rection of arrow 1 until the sliding
as the usual airflow noises. These sunroof and the cover are in the re-
are caused by small pressure fluc- quired position.
tuations in the vehicle interior. or
P 77.00-2147-31
Change the position of the sliding  Briefly press the switch in the direc-
sunroof or open a side window tion of arrow 1 beyond the pres-
slightly to reduce or eliminate these sure point and release it.
noises.
The sliding sunroof opens fully.
To stop:
i
 Press the switch in any direc-
You can also open the sliding/ Operating the sliding/tilting sun-
tion.
tilting sunroof from the outside: roof
The sliding sunroof stops in its
 Opening using the "summer 1 To open current position.
opening feature" ( page 221) 2 To close
 Closing using the "convenience 3 To raise
closing feature" ( page 221) 4 To lower
 Make sure that the ignition is
switched on.

214 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Open-air

Closing Raising The sliding/tilting sunroof then raises


at the rear to continue to ventilate the
 Press and hold the switch in the di- You can raise the sliding/tilting sun-
vehicle interior.
rection of arrow 2 until the sliding roof at the rear to provide ventilation.
sunroof is in the required position.  Press and hold the switch in the di- i
or rection of arrow 3 until the The sliding/tilting sunroof does not
 Briefly press the switch in the direc-
sliding/tilting sunroof is in the re- close if:
tion of arrow 2 beyond the pres- quired position.
 it is raised at the rear
sure point.
Lowering and closing  it is blocked
The sliding sunroof closes fully.
 Pull and hold the switch in the di-  there is no rain on the wind-
To stop: screen (e.g. because the vehi-
rection of arrow 4 until the
 Press the switch in any direc- sliding/tilting sunroof has lowered cle is under a bridge or in a
tion. and is fully closed. carport)
The sliding sunroof stops in its
current position. Rain closing feature
 Close the cover manually if neces- The sliding sunroof closes automatical-
Risk of injury G
sary ( page 216). ly:
The sliding sunroof will not open au-
 if it starts to rain tomatically if it is closed using the
 at extreme outside temperatures rain closing feature and is obstruct-
 after 12 hours ed.

 if there are voltage supply malfunc-


tions

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 215


Controls in detail
Open-air

Opening and closing the cover Resetting the sliding/tilting  Remove the sliding/tilting sunroof
sunroof fuse from the main fuse box
The cover is used to protect you from
( page 439).
sunlight. When you open the sliding The sliding/tilting sunroof must be re-
sunroof, the cover moves back with it. set if:  Replace the fuse.

When the sliding/tilting sunroof is  the battery has been disconnected  Switch on the ignition.
closed or raised at the rear, you can or has become discharged  Press and hold the switch
open or close the cover manually. ( page 214) in the direction of ar-
 the sliding/tilting sunroof was
closed manually (emergency opera- row 3 until the sliding/tilting sun-
tion) ( page 405) roof is fully raised at the rear.
 the sliding/tilting sunroof can only  Keep the switch pressed for about a
be opened jerkily second longer.
 there has been a malfunction  Check whether the sliding/tilting
sunroof can be opened fully again
(automatically) ( page 214).
If you cannot open the sliding/tilting
sunroof fully (automatically):
 Reset the sliding/tilting sunroof
again.

216 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Open-air

Panorama sliding sunroof


with roller sunblind*
The roller sunblind protects you from
strong sunlight beaming through the P 77.00-2083-31 P 77.00-2077-31
panorama sliding sunroof.

Opening and closing the roller


sunblind
The two roller sunblinds can only be
opened and closed when the panorama
sliding sunroof is closed, and can only Panorama sliding sunroof switch, Roller sunblind switch, rear
be operated simultaneously. front
1 To open
1 To open 2 To close
Risk of injury G 2 To close  Make sure that the ignition is
switched on.
Make sure that nobody can be
trapped as you open or close the
roller sunblinds.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 217


Controls in detail
Open-air

Opening Opening and closing the pano-


 Press and hold the switch in the di- rama sliding sunroof Risk of injury G
rection of arrow 1 until the roller
sunblinds have reached the re-
quired position.
Risk of injury G The glass in the panorama sliding
sunroof could smash in an accident.
or Make sure that nobody becomes If you are not wearing a seat belt,
 Briefly press the switch beyond the trapped when closing the panorama there is a danger of being thrown
pressure point in the direction of sliding sunroof. If danger threatens, through the opening in the event of
arrow 1. press the opening switch. the vehicle overturning. Therefore,
The roller sunblinds open fully. always wear a seat belt to reduce
the risk of injuries.
To stop:
 Press the switch in any direc-
Risk of injury G
tion. !
Your vehicle can be started using a Only open the panorama sliding
The roller sunblinds stop in valid KEYLESS GO key*. For this rea- sunroof if it is free of snow and ice.
their current positions. son, children should never be left Otherwise malfunctions may occur.
unsupervised in the vehicle. Always
Closing Do not allow objects to protrude
take the KEYLESS GO key* with you from the panorama sliding sunroof,
 Pull the switch in the direction of ar- when leaving the vehicle, even if you as they could damage the sealing
row 2 and hold it until the roller are only leaving it for a short time. strips.
sunblinds are in the required posi-
tion.

218 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Open-air

 Make sure that the ignition is Closing


i
switched on.
You can also open the panorama  Press the switch in the direction of
sliding sunroof from the outside: arrow 2 and hold it until the pano-
Opening rama sliding sunroof is in the re-
 Opening using the "summer
 Press the switch in the direction of quired position.
opening feature" ( page 221)
arrow 1 and hold it until the pano-
 Closing using the "convenience rama sliding sunroof is in the re- i
closing feature" ( page 221) quired position. It is not possible to have an automat-
ic closing function on the panorama
or
sliding sunroof.
 Briefly press the switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of ar- Raising at the rear
row 1.
P 77.00-2082-31  Press the switch in the direction of
The panorama sliding sunroof arrow 3 and hold it until the pano-
opens fully. rama sliding sunroof is in the re-
To stop: quired position.
 Press the switch in any direc-
tion. Lowering at the rear
The panorama sliding sunroof  Pull the switch in the direction of ar-
1 To open stops in its current position. row 4 and hold it until the pano-
2 To close rama sliding sunroof has lowered at
3 To raise the rear and is fully closed.
4 To lower

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 219


Controls in detail
Open-air

Resetting the panorama sliding  Switch on the ignition.  Press and hold the switch in the di-
sunroof and the roller sunblind  Press the switch in the direction of
rection of arrow 2 until the pano-
arrow 2 until the roller sunblinds rama sliding sunroof is fully closed.
The panorama sliding sunroof and the
roller sunblinds must be reset if: are fully closed.  Keep the switch pressed for about a
 Keep the switch pressed for about a second longer.
 the battery has been disconnected
or has become discharged second longer.  Check whether the panorama slid-
 Press the switch in the direction of
ing sunroof can be opened fully
 the panorama sliding sunroof was
arrow 1 until the roller sunblinds again (automatically) ( page 218).
closed manually (emergency opera-
tion) ( page 405) are fully open. If you cannot open the panorama slid-
 Keep the switch pressed for about a ing sunroof fully (automatically):
 the panorama sliding sunroof can
only be opened jerkily second longer.  Reset the panorama sliding sunroof
 Press and hold the switch in the di-
again.
 there has been a malfunction
rection of arrow 3 until the pano-
 Remove the panorama sliding sun-
rama sliding sunroof is raised.
roof fuse from the main fuse box
( page 439).  Keep the switch pressed for about a
second longer.
 Replace the fuse.

220 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Open-air

Summer opening  Point the tip of the remote control


In warm weather, you can ventilate the at the driver's door handle. Risk of injury G
vehicle before a journey. To do this, the  Unlock the vehicle by pressing and
following are operated simultaneously Make sure that nobody can be
holding the Πswitch on the re-
using the remote control: trapped as you close the side win-
mote control until the side windows
 the sliding/tilting sunroof*/ dows and the sliding/tilting
and the sliding/tilting sunroof*/
panorama sliding sunroof* is panorama sliding sunroof* are in sunroof*/panorama sliding sun-
opened the required position. roof*.
 the side windows are opened Proceed as follows if danger threat-
 the seat ventilation* is switched on
Convenience closing ens:
When you lock the vehicle, you can With the remote control:
i close the side windows and the sliding/
tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding sun-  Release the ‹ button.
The summer opening function can
only be operated via the remote roof* simultaneously.  Press and hold the Πswitch
control. until the side windows and the
sliding/tilting sunroof*/pano-
rama sliding sunroof* open
again.

E2_F1
B13+16P80.00-2077-31

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 221


Controls in detail
Open-air

With the remote control With KEYLESS GO*


Risk of injury G
With KEYLESS GO*:
E2_F1
 Release the locking button on
B13+16_P80.00-2077-31 E2_F1
the door handle.
 Pull the door handle and hold it P80.30-2163-31
firmly.
The side windows and the
sliding/tilting sunroof*/
panorama sliding sunroof*
open.  Point the tip of the remote control 1 Locking button on the door handle
at the driver's door handle.
 Press and hold the locking button
 Lock the vehicle by pressing and on the door handle until the side
holding the ‹ switch until the windows and the sliding/tilting
side windows and the sliding/ tilt- sunroof*/panorama sliding sun-
ing sunroof*/panorama sliding roof* are closed.
sunroof are fully closed.
 Check that all the side windows and
 Check that all the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof*/ pano-
the sliding/tilting sunroof*/ pano- rama sliding sunroof* are closed.
rama sliding sunroof* are closed.

222 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems
 Driving systems
Your vehicle's driving systems are de-
Cruise control
scribed on the following pages.
Cruise control controls your vehicle's
Risk of accident G
 Cruise control, Distronic*, speed for you.
Speedtronic and SBC Stop*, with Do not use cruise control:
which you can control your vehi- Use cruise control if road and traffic
conditions make it appropriate to main-  in road and traffic conditions
cle's speed which do not allow you to main-
tain a steady speed for a prolonged pe-
 SBC Stop* and SBC Hold relieve riod. You can store any road speed tain a constant speed (e.g.
the strain on the driver when pulling above 20 mph (30 km/h). heavy traffic or winding roads).
away, manoeuvring and driving in You could otherwise cause an
traffic jams accident
 Vehicle level setting and
Risk of accident G  on slippery roads. The drive
Airmatic DC*, which can be used to wheels could lose traction when
control your vehicle's chassis Cruise control cannot take account braking or manoeuvring and the
of road and traffic conditions. vehicle could skid
 Parktronic*, which assists you with
parking and manoeuvring Always pay attention to traffic con-  when there is poor visibility, e.g.
ditions even when cruise control is due to fog, heavy rain or snow
The BAS, ABS, ESP and SBC driving
safety systems are described in the activated.
"Safety" section ( page 76). Cruise control is only an aid de- i
signed to assist driving. You are re- If you are driving slower than
sponsible for the vehicle's distance 10 mph (15 km/h) or the vehicle is
from other vehicles, the vehicle's stationary, switch SBC Stop* on us-
speed and braking in good time. ing the cruise control lever.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 223


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Cruise control lever Cruise control display in the in-


The cruise control lever is used to strument cluster
operate: When you activate cruise control:
 cruise control P 54.25-2578-31  the stored speed is shown in the
 variable Speedtronic multi-function display
 SBC Stop*  the segments in the speedometer
from the stored speed up to the
i maximum speed light up
The last speed stored is cleared
when you switch off the engine.
i
1 To store the current speed or a
If the segments in the speedome-
higher speed
The cruise control lever is the upper- ter flash, cruise control is deacti-
2 To store the current speed or a low-
most lever on the left of the steering vated, e.g.:
er speed
wheel. 3 To switch off cruise control  during aquaplaning
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise 4 To resume the last speed stored  in vehicles with automatic
control lever indicates which system 5 To switch between cruise control transmission*: when you move
you have selected: and Speedtronic the selector lever to N while
6 LIM indicator lamp driving.
 Cruise control, SBC Stop*
LIM indicator lamp off
 Variable Speedtronic
LIM indicator lamp lit

224 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Selecting cruise control i Selecting a stored speed


 Check whether cruise control is ac- Cruise control may be unable to
tivated. In this case, the LIM indica- maintain the stored speed on uphill Risk of accident G
tor lamp is off. or downhill gradients. The stored
 Otherwise press the cruise control speed is resumed when the gradient Only select a stored speed if you
lever in the direction of arrow 5. evens out. know what that speed is and wheth-
The LIM indicator lamp in the cruise Vehicles with manual transmission: er it is suitable for the current situa-
control lever is off. Cruise control is  Always drive at adequate but not tion. Otherwise sudden acceleration
selected. excessive engine speeds or braking could endanger yourself
 Change gear in good time or others.
Storing the current speed
 Do not change down several
 Accelerate/decelerate the vehicle  Press the cruise control lever briefly
gears at a time if possible
to the desired speed. in the direction of arrow 4.
 Move the cruise control lever briefly Cruise control adjusts the vehicle's
upwards or downwards and release speed to the last speed stored.
the accelerator pedal completely.  Release the accelerator pedal.
The current speed is stored.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 225


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting a higher speed Setting a lower speed Deactivating cruise control


 Press and hold the cruise control le-  Press and hold the cruise control le- There are a number of ways of deacti-
ver in the direction of arrow 1 until ver in the direction of arrow 2 until vating cruise control:
the desired speed has been the desired speed has been  Press the cruise control lever briefly
reached. reached. in the direction of arrow 3.
 Release the cruise control lever.  Release the cruise control lever.
Cruise control is deactivated. The
The new speed is stored. The new speed is stored. last speed set remains stored.
or
i Fine adjustment in 0.5 mph
Cruise control is not deactivated if  Apply the brakes.
(1 km/h) increments
you depress the accelerator pedal. If or
you accelerate briefly to overtake,
Faster  Press the cruise control lever briefly
cruise control adjusts the vehicle's
 Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 5.
speed to the last speed stored after
you have finished overtaking. in the direction of arrow 1. Cruise control is deactivated. Varia-
ble Speedtronic is selected. The
Slower LIM indicator lamp in the cruise
control lever is lit.
 Press the cruise control lever briefly
in the direction of arrow 2. i
The last speed stored is cleared
when you switch off the engine.

226 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Distronic*
Distronic assists you when driving on
Distronic is only an aid designed to
assist driving. You are responsible
Risk of accident G
motorways or dual carriageways. for the vehicle's distance from other Deactivate Distronic:
 If a slower-moving vehicle is detect- vehicles, the vehicle's speed and
ed in front, Distronic causes your  when changing from the outside
braking in good time.
vehicle to brake and maintain a pre- lane to the inside lane if vehicles
Do not switch on Distronic: in the outside lane are travelling
set distance from the vehicle in
front.  in road and traffic conditions more slowly
 If there is no vehicle in front, which do not allow you to main-  when driving in a filter lane or
Distronic operates in the same way tain a constant speed (e.g. motorway exit
as cruise control ( page 223). heavy traffic or winding roads).
 when driving in complex road
You could otherwise cause an
and traffic conditions, e.g.
accident
Risk of accident G  on slippery roads. The drive
through motorway roadworks
Otherwise Distronic maintains the
wheels could lose traction when
Distronic cannot take account of stored speed.
braking or manoeuvring and the
road and traffic conditions. vehicle could skid Distronic does not react:
Always pay attention to traffic con-  when there is poor visibility, e.g.  to a stationary obstacle, e.g. in a
ditions even when Distronic is acti- due to fog, heavy rain or snow traffic jam or to a vehicle which
vated. has broken down
 to an oncoming vehicle in the
same lane

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 227


Controls in detail
Driving systems

When Distronic is activated, one or two If Distronic detects a vehicle in front,


Distronic brakes your vehicle at a segments in the set speed range light the segments between the speed of the
maximum of 2 m/s2. This corre- up. vehicle in front and the set speed light
sponds to approximately 20% of up.
your vehicle's maximum brake i The l distance warning lamp in the
power. You must apply the brakes For design reasons, the speed dis- instrument cluster lights up if the dis-
yourself if this brake power is insuf- played in the speedometer may dif- tance to the vehicle in front is too small.
ficient to avoid a collision. fer slightly from the speed set with
Distronic.
Distronic displays in the
Risk of accident G
speedometer If Distronic detects a risk of collision
with the vehicle in front:
 the l distance warning lamp
P54.70-2223-31 in the instrument cluster lights
up
P54.70-2225-31
 an intermittent warning signal
sounds
Brake to avoid crashing.

1 Segments

1 Set speed

228 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

The intermittent warning signal Distronic deactivated Distronic activated


stops and the l distance warn-
When Distronic is switched off you will When Distronic is activated, you will
ing lamp goes out once you have re-
see the standard Distronic display in see the set speed for approximately
established the required distance
the multi-function display. five seconds in the multi-function dis-
from the vehicle in front.
play. With Distronic activated, you will
i see the following in the multi-function
display:
Distronic brakes your vehicle at a P 54.30-5134-31
maximum of 2 m/s2. This corre-
sponds to approximately 20% of
your vehicle's maximum possible P 54.30-5135-31
deceleration.
1 Vehicle in front, if detected
Distronic menu in the operating 2 Actual distance to the vehicle in
system front
3 Specified minimum distance to the 1 Distronic is activated
You can read the current Distronic set- vehicle in front
tings in the Distronic menu. The multi- 4 Own vehicle
function display shown depends on 5 Symbol for activated audible dis-
whether Distronic and the distance tance warning function
warning function are activated or deac-
tivated.
 Press the è or ÿ button re-
peatedly until you see one of the
following two messages in the mul-
ti-function display.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 229


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Cruise control lever Selecting Distronic


The cruise control lever is used to  Check whether Distronic is select-
operate: ed. Distronic is selected if the LIM
 Distronic P 54.25-2578-31 indicator lamp in the cruise control
lever is not lit.
 variable Speedtronic
 Otherwise press the cruise control
 SBC Stop* lever in the direction of arrow 5.
The cruise control lever is the upper- The LIM indicator lamp in the cruise
most lever on the left of the steering control lever is off. Distronic is se-
wheel. lected.
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise 1 To store the current speed or a
control lever indicates which system higher speed Activating Distronic
you have selected: 2 To store the current speed or a low-
er speed You can activate Distronic if:
 Distronic, SBC Stop* 3 To deactivate Distronic  you are driving at a speed between
LIM indicator lamp off 4 To resume the last speed stored 20 mph (30 km/h) and 110 mph
5 To switch between Distronic and (180 km/h)
 Variable Speedtronic
variable Speedtronic
LIM indicator lamp lit  ESP is activated ( page 80)
6 LIM indicator lamp
 SBC Stop* is deactivated
( page 244)

230 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

If Distronic is not activated after the Storing the current speed


cruise control lever is pressed, you will
 Accelerate/decelerate the vehicle
see the message – – – in the multi-func-
to the desired speed.
tion display.
 Move the cruise control lever briefly P 54.25-2578-31
You cannot activate Distronic in the fol-
upwards or downwards and release
lowing circumstances:
the accelerator pedal completely.
 for up to two minutes after the en-
Distronic is activated and the cur-
gine is started
rent speed is stored.
 when braking
 when applying the parking brake
i
If you do not fully release the accel- 1 To store the current speed or a
 vehicles with automatic transmis- higher speed
erator pedal, the Distronic
sion: when the selector lever is in passive message appears in the 2 To store the current speed or a low-
position P, R or N multi-function display. The distance er speed
to a slower-moving vehicle in front 3 To deactivate Distronic
will not then be governed. You will 4 To resume the last speed stored
be driving at the speed determined 5 To switch between Distronic and
by the position of the accelerator variable Speedtronic
pedal. 6 LIM indicator lamp

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 231


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting a higher speed Adjustment in 5 mph (10 km/h) Resuming a stored speed
 Press and hold the cruise control le- increments
ver in the direction of arrow 1 until Faster Risk of accident G
the desired speed has been
 Press the cruise control lever briefly
reached. Only resume a stored speed when
in the direction of arrow 1.
 Release the cruise control lever. this is appropriate for the current
Slower
The new speed is stored. road and traffic conditions. Other-
 Press the cruise control lever briefly
wise sudden acceleration or braking
in the direction of arrow 2.
Setting a lower speed could endanger yourself or others.
 Press and hold the cruise control le- Fine adjustment in 0.5 mph
ver in the direction of arrow 2 until  Press the cruise control lever
(1 km/h) increments
the desired speed has been briefly in the direction of arrow 4
Faster and release the accelerator pedal
reached.
 Press the cruise control lever briefly completely.
 Release the cruise control lever.
in the direction of arrow 4. Distronic is activated and adjusts
The new speed is stored. the vehicle's speed to the last
or
speed stored.
 Press and hold the cruise control le-
ver briefly in the direction of
arrow 4 until the desired speed
has been reached.

232 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Deactivating Distronic Distronic switches off automatically


i
when:
There are various ways of deactivating The Distronic off message
Distronic:  you depress the parking brake
appears in the multi-function dis-
 Press the cruise control lever briefly play for approximately five se-  you are driving under 20 mph
in the direction of arrow 3. conds. (30 km/h)
Distronic is deactivated.  ESP ( page 78) intervenes or you
The last speed stored remains deactivate ESP
or
stored until you start the engine  you move the selector lever to N
 Apply the brakes.
again. while driving
Distronic is deactivated.
Distronic is not deactivated if you A signal sounds when Distronic is deac-
or depress the accelerator pedal. If tivated. The Distronic off mes-
 Press the cruise control lever briefly you accelerate briefly to overtake, sage appears in the multi-function
in the direction of arrow 5. Distronic adjusts the vehicle's display for approximately five seconds.
speed to the last speed stored after
Distronic is deactivated. Variable
you have finished overtaking.
Speedtronic is selected. The LIM in-
dicator lamp in the cruise control le-
ver is lit.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 233


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting the specified minimum The thumbwheel for the time span is on Decreasing the specified mini-
distance for Distronic the lower section of the centre console. mum distance
You can set the specified minimum dis- If you decrease the specified minimum
tance for Distronic by varying the time distance, Distronic maintains a reduced
span between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. distance from the vehicle in front.
This time span determines the distance P 54.70-2298-31  Turn thumbwheel 3 in the direc-
to the vehicle in front, which is gov- tion of ®.
erned by Distronic depending on your
vehicle's speed. You can see the dis-
Distance warning function
tance in the multi-function display.
This function warns you when the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front is too small,
even when Distronic is switched off:
1 To switch the distance warning sig-
 The l distance warning lamp in
nal on/off
the instrument cluster lights up.
2 Indicator lamp
3 To set the specified minimum dis-  An intermittent signal will sound if
tance necessary.
You must apply the brakes yourself to
Increasing the specified mini- maintain the correct distance to the ve-
mum distance hicle in front in order to avoid a colli-
sion.
If you increase the specified minimum
distance, Distronic maintains a greater
distance from the vehicle in front.
 Turn thumbwheel 3 in the direc-
tion of ¯.

234 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Activating In such situations, brake if necessary.


Risk of accident G  Press button 1.
Distronic is then deactivated.

Indicator lamp 2 in the switch Cornering, going into and coming


Pay careful attention to the traffic
lights up. A loudspeaker symbol is
situation if: out of a bend
shown in the multi-function display
 the l distance warning lamp in the speedometer ( page 229).
in the instrument cluster lights
up Deactivating
 and/or the intermittent signal  Press button 1. P 54.70-2219-31
sounds
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch
Brake or swerve to avoid the obsta- goes out. No loudspeaker symbol is
cle if necessary. shown in the multi-function display
in the speedometer.
i
Tips for driving with Distronic
Distronic does not always clearly When cornering, Distronic may not de-
recognise complex road and traffic The following contains descriptions of tect vehicles travelling in front or it may
conditions. You will then receive certain road and traffic conditions in detect them too soon. The vehicle may
false distance warning signals or which you must pay particular atten- brake suddenly or brake late.
none at all. tion.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 235


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Driving on a different line Other vehicles changing lane Narrow vehicles

P 54.70-2220-31 P 54.70-2221-31 P 54.70-2222-31

Distronic may not detect a vehicle trav- Distronic has still not detected the vehi- Distronic has still not detected the vehi-
elling on a different line. The distance to cle cutting in. The distance to the vehi- cle in front on the edge of the carriage-
the vehicle in front will be too short. cle cutting in will be too short. way because of its relatively narrow
width. The distance to the vehicle in
front will be too short.

236 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

i The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise


Speedtronic
control lever indicates which system
Speedtronic is used to make sure that The speed indicated in the speedo-
you have selected:
you do not exceed a certain set speed. meter may differ slightly from the
You can set a variable or permanent limit speed stored.  Cruise control, Distronic*,
limit speed: SBC Stop*
You can change the unit for the
Variable for speed limits, e.g. in speed display using the operating LIM indicator lamp off
built-up areas system ( page 144).  Variable Speedtronic
Permanent for long-term speed re- LIM indicator lamp lit
strictions, e.g. for driv- Variable Speedtronic
When the engine is running, you can
ing on winter tyres The cruise control lever is used to use the cruise control lever to limit the
operate: vehicle's speed to any speed:
Risk of accident G  cruise control or Distronic*  from 20 mph (30 km/h) upwards
 SBC Stop* with cruise control activated
Speedtronic is only an aid designed
 variable Speedtronic  from 5 mph (10 km/h) upwards us-
to assist driving. You are responsi- ing Distronic*
ble for the vehicle's speed and for The cruise control lever is the upper-
most lever on the left of the steering  from 4 mph (7 km/h) in vehicles
braking in good time.
wheel. with Distronic* and 4MATIC*

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 237


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Selecting variable Speedtronic


 Check whether Speedtronic is acti- Risk of accident G
vated. The LIM indicator lamp must
be lit. If there is a change of drivers, advise
P54.25-2578-31
the new driver of the limit speed
 Otherwise press the cruise control
lever in the direction of arrow 5. stored.

The LIM indicator lamp is lit. Only use variable Speedtronic if you
Speedtronic is selected. are sure that you will not have to ac-
celerate suddenly to a speed above
that stored as the limit speed, other-
1 To store the current or a higher wise you could cause an accident.
speed, rounded up to the next high-
est multiple of 5 mph (10 km/h) You can only exceed the stored limit
2 To store the current or a lower speed if you switch off variable
speed, rounded to the next lowest Speedtronic, e.g. by depressing the
multiple of 5 mph (10 km/h) accelerator pedal beyond the pres-
3 To deactivate the variable speed sure point (kickdown).
limiter
4 To resume the variable limit speed
stored
5 To switch between cruise control,
Distronic*, SBC Stop* and
Speedtronic
6 LIM indicator lamp

238 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Storing the current speed The segments in the speedometer from Calling up a stored speed
the start of the scale up to the stored
 Press the cruise control lever briefly  Press the cruise control lever briefly
speed light up.
in the direction of arrow 1. in the direction of arrow 4.
The speed displayed is stored. i Vehicles with a petrol engine:
Speedtronic rounds the speed up Speedtronic may be unable to pre- If the road speed is no more than
to the next highest multiple of vent the limit speed from being ex- 20 mph (30 km/h) above the
5 mph (10 km/h). ceeded on downhill gradients (not stored limit speed, Speedtronic will
or the case with Distronic*). limit the vehicle's speed to the last
 Press the cruise control lever briefly In this case: limit speed stored.
in the direction of arrow 2.  a signal sounds
The speed displayed is stored.  the LIMIT exceeded! mes-
Speedtronic rounds the speed sage appears in the multi-func-
down to the next lowest multiple of tion display
5 mph (10 km/h).
 the segments in the speedome-
The stored speed is shown in the multi- ter flash
function display.
Apply the brakes yourself if neces-
sary.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 239


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Adjustment in 5 mph (10 km/h) Fine adjustment in increments of  Press the cruise control lever briefly
increments 0.5 mph (1 km/h) in the direction of arrow 5.
Higher speed Higher speed Variable Speedtronic is deactivat-
ed. The LIM indicator lamp goes
 Press the cruise control lever briefly  Press the cruise control lever briefly
out. Cruise control or Distronic* is
in the direction of arrow 1. in the direction of arrow 4.
selected.
or or
 Press and hold the cruise control le-  Press and hold the cruise control le- Variable Speedtronic switches off auto-
ver in the direction of arrow 1 until ver in the direction of arrow 4 until matically:
the desired speed has been the desired speed has been  if you depress the accelerator pedal
reached. reached. beyond the pressure point (kick-
Lower speed down) and
Deactivating variable  if the accelerator pedal is de-
 Press the cruise control lever briefly
Speedtronic pressed beyond the pressure point
in the direction of arrow 2.
There are various ways of deactivating (kickdown) and your current speed
or differs from the stored speed by no
variable Speedtronic:
 Press and hold the cruise control le- more than 12 mph (20 km/h)
 Press the cruise control lever briefly
ver in the direction of arrow 2 until
in the direction of arrow 3.
the desired speed has been
reached. Variable Speedtronic is deactivat-
ed.
or

240 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Low speed limiter* i You cannot exceed the set limit speed,
even if you depress the accelerator
You can use the low speed limiter in ve- You cannot use the low speed limiter
pedal beyond the pressure point (kick-
hicles fitted with 4MATIC* and Distro- immediately after starting the en-
down).
nic*. gine. You must remove your foot
You can use this function to restrict the from the brake pedal and wait a few i
speed at any speed above 4 mph seconds before you can use the low
The set limit speed can be stored
(7 km/h) using the cruise control lever. speed limiter.
separately for each individual
Use the low speed limiter in the same key ( page 155). If permanent
Permanent Speedtronic Speedtronic is used to set the limit
way as variable Speedtronic
( page 237). You can use the operating system to for winter tyres, you must:
limit the speed permanently to a value  switch off the key dependence
Use the low speed limiter:
between 100 mph (160 km/h) (e.g. for
 on poor road surfaces (e.g. off- driving on winter tyres) and the maxi- or
road) mum speed.  set the same limit speed for all
 on steep downhill gradients Permanent Speedtronic remains active, keys
even if variable Speedtronic is deacti-
vated.
The set maximum speed is displayed in
the multi-function display shortly be-
fore this speed is reached.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 241


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting permanent Speedtronic SBC Stop*


de P 54.30-6187-31
 Press the è or ÿ button re- SBC Stop is only available in conjunc-
peatedly until you see the Set- tion with automatic transmission*.
tings... menu in the multi- SBC Stop can relieve the strain on the
function display ( page 140). driver when driving in traffic jams.
 Press the k or j button.  When the accelerator pedal is re-
The collection of submenus is dis-  Move the bar to the desired value leased, the vehicle is continuously
played. using the æ and ç button. braked until it comes to a complete
You can select the following: stop.
 Move the bar to the Vehicle sub-
menu using the æ or ç but-  off  Once the vehicle has come to a
ton. Permanent Speedtronic is de- complete stop, it is kept stationary
activated. without the driver having to depress
 Press the k or j button re-
 in increments of 5 mph be- the brake pedal.
peatedly until the Speed limit
(winter tyres) message ap- tween 100 mph (160 km/h)  As soon as you accelerate to pull
pears in the multi-function display. and 150 mph (240 km/h) away, the brakes are released.

The current setting is highlighted. Permanent Speedtronic re-


stricts the vehicle's speed to Risk of accident G
the value which has been set.
SBC Stop does not take into ac-
count any obstacles or the distance
to the vehicle in front. You must ap-
ply the brakes yourself to maintain
sufficient distance and to avoid driv-
ing too close to the vehicle in front.

242 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

 Variable Speedtronic Selecting SBC Stop


Risk of accident G LIM indicator lamp lit  Check whether SBC Stop is select-
ed. SBC Stop is selected if the LIM
SBC Stop does not take into ac- indicator lamp in the cruise control
count the road or traffic conditions. lever is not lit.
Do not use SBC Stop on slippery  Otherwise press the cruise control
roads, for example. P54.25-2578-31 lever in the direction of arrow 5.
The LIM indicator lamp in the cruise
Cruise control lever control lever is off. SBC Stop is se-
The cruise control lever is used to lected.
operate:
 cruise control or Distronic* Activating SBC Stop
 variable Speedtronic 1 To activate SBC Stop You can only activate SBC Stop if:
2 To activate SBC Stop  the vehicle is stationary or moving
 SBC Stop 3 To deactivate SBC Stop slowly (up to 10 mph or 15 km/h)
The cruise control lever is the upper- 4 To activate SBC Stop
most lever on the left of the steering 5 To deactivate SBC Stop, and
wheel. to switch between cruise control,  the selector lever is at D or N
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise Distronic*, SBC Stop and the varia-
SBC Stop remains activated up to a
control lever indicates which system ble speed limiter
speed of 40 mph (60 km/h).
you have selected: 6 LIM indicator lamp

 Cruise control, Distronic*, SBC


Stop
LIM indicator lamp off

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 243


Controls in detail
Driving systems

 the driver's door or the bonnet is The LIM indicator lamp in the cruise
i
open control lever lights up. The variable
If you are driving faster than speed limiter can be selected.
20 mph (30 km/h), switch cruise  the engine is not running
control or Distronic* on using the !
cruise control lever. Risk of accident G SBC Stop must be deactivated for it
to be possible to select cruise con-
 Press the cruise control lever briefly trol or Distronic*.
The vehicle is braked when SBC
in the direction of arrow 1, 2 or
Stop is activated. For this reason,
4. SBC Stop is automatically deactivated
deactivate SBC Stop if the vehicle is
SBC Stop is activated. The SBCS to be set in motion by other means if:
message is shown in the multi-func- (e.g. in a car wash or by towing).  the vehicle is accelerated to speeds
tion display. above 40 mph (60 km/h)
Deactivating SBC Stop  the selector lever is moved to posi-
 Press the cruise control lever briefly
tion P
in the direction of arrow 3.  reverse gear R is engaged and you
then pull away
SBC Stop is deactivated.
 the anti-lock braking system (ABS)
or
is operating and the speed falls be-
 Press the cruise control lever in the low approximately 3 mph (5 km/h)
SBC Stop is activated
direction of arrow 5.
You cannot activate SBC Stop if:
 the parking brake is depressed

244 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

 Apply the brakes immediately or


Risk of accident G Risk of accident G shift the selector lever to position
P.
The SBC Stop braking effect is inter- Never get out of the vehicle when The vehicle is secured against roll-
rupted and the vehicle could roll SBC Stop is activated. ing away.
away if: SBC Stop must never be operated or SBC Stop is deactivated and the
 an occupant deactivates deactivated by a passenger or from warning message in the multi-func-
SBC Stop using the cruise con- outside the vehicle. tion display goes out.
trol lever
SBC Stop does not replace the park-
 you or an occupant depress the ing brake and must not be used for
accelerator pedal parking.
 the system or the voltage supply
has malfunctioned (battery fail- The Selector lever in park
ure) position warning message appears
 the electrical system in the en- in the multi-function display if SBC Stop
gine compartment or the fuses is activated and:
have been tampered with  the driver's door is opened
 the battery is disconnected  the bonnet is opened
If you wish to leave the vehicle or  the ignition is switched off
park it, deactivate SBC Stop
 the system or the voltage supply
( page 244) and secure the vehicle
has malfunctioned
against rolling away
( see page 47).

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 245


Controls in detail
Driving systems

A regular warning will also sound at reg-  Quickly depress the brake pedal to
SBC Hold
ular intervals if SBC Stop is activated the stop until the SBCH message
and you: SBC Hold relieves the strain on the appears in the multi-function dis-
driver: play.
 open the bonnet
 when pulling away, especially on
 stop the engine and open the driv-  Release the brake pedal.
steep slopes
er's door SBC Hold is activated.
 when manoeuvring on steep slopes
The warning draws your attention to the
 when waiting in traffic
fact that the vehicle has been parked
while SBC Stop is still activated. It be- The vehicle is kept stationary without
comes louder if you attempt to lock the the driver having to depress the brake
vehicle. pedal.
 Apply the brakes immediately or The braking effect is cancelled when
shift the selector lever to position the accelerator pedal is depressed and
P. SBC Hold is deactivated as the vehicle SBC Hold is activated
The vehicle is secured against roll- pulls away. You cannot activate SBC Hold if:
ing away.  the parking brake is depressed
Activating SBC Hold
SBC Stop is deactivated and the  the driver's door or the bonnet is
warning is switched off. The warn- You can activate SBC Hold if:
open
ing message in the multi-function  the vehicle is stationary,
display goes out.  the engine is not running
and
i  the selector lever* is at D, R or N
If the ignition has been switched
 Stop the vehicle.
off, the engine cannot be started
again until SBC Stop has been de-  Apply the brake.
activated.

246 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Risk of accident G Risk of accident G Risk of accident G


The vehicle is braked when SBC The SBC Hold braking effect is can- Never get out of the vehicle while
Hold is activated. For this reason, celled and the vehicle could roll SBC Hold is activated.
deactivate SBC Hold if the vehicle is away if: SBC Hold must never be operated or
to be set in motion by other means  an occupant deactivates deactivated by a passenger or from
(e.g. in a car wash or by towing). SBC Hold by depressing the ac- outside the vehicle.
celerator pedal or the brake
SBC Hold does not replace the park-
Deactivating SBC Hold pedal
ing brake and must not be used for
SBC Hold is automatically deactivated  the system or the voltage supply parking.
if: (e.g. battery failure) has mal-
functioned
 you accelerate
 the electrical system in the en-
 you move the selector lever* to po-
gine compartment or the fuses
sition P
have been tampered with
 you apply the brakes again with a
 the battery is disconnected
certain amount of pressure until the
SBCH message in the multi-func- If you wish to leave the vehicle or
tion display goes out park it, deactivate SBC Hold and se-
 SBC Stop is activated ( page 243) cure the vehicle against rolling away
( see page 47).

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 247


Controls in detail
Driving systems

The following warning appears in the If the vehicle is not secured against roll-
Airmatic DC*
multi-function display if SBC Hold is ac- ing away within a certain time or the
tivated and the driver's door is opened, bonnet is opened when SBC Hold is ac-
Vehicle level
the ignition is switched off or there is a tive, a warning will sound at regular in-
malfunction either in the system or the tervals in addition to the warning in the Your vehicle automatically adjusts its
voltage supply: multi-function display. This draws your height:
 Brake immediately! (vehicles attention to the fact that the vehicle has  to reduce petrol consumption
with manual transmission) been parked while SBC Hold is still ac-
 to improve operating safety
tive.
 Selector lever in park The following vehicle levels are possi-
position (vehicles with auto- The warning becomes louder if you at-
ble:
matic transmission) tempt to lock the vehicle.
 Normal
 Apply the brakes immediately or  Apply the brakes immediately or
shift the selector lever* to position  Raised
shift the selector lever* to position
P. P.  Lowered
The vehicle is secured against roll- The vehicle is secured against roll- The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle lev-
ing away. ing away. els can be set manually. The "Lowered"
SBC Hold and the warning are deac- vehicle level is set automatically:
SBC Hold is deactivated and the
warning message in the multi-func- tivated. The warning message in the  at speeds above 85 mph
tion display goes out. multi-function display goes out. (140 km/h)
i  when "Sports tuning" is selected
( page 250)
If the ignition has been switched
off, the engine cannot be started
again until SBC Hold has been
deactivated.

248 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting the vehicle level The switch is located on the lower sec- You will see the following message
manually tion of the centre console. in the multi-function display:
Vehicle rising!
Select the setting:
If indicator lamp 2 is lit:
Normal for normal driving
The "Raised" vehicle level was se-
Raised for driving with snow chains
P 32.30-2053-31 lected.
fitted or on poor road sur-
faces
Setting the normal level
 Start the engine.
Risk of injury G
If the indicator lamp is lit:
Make sure that nobody is in the vi-  Press switch 1 again.
cinity of the wheel housing or under 1 To set the vehicle level Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The ve-
the vehicle while lowering the vehi- 2 Indicator lamp hicle is adjusted to the normal level.
cle when it is stationary. Otherwise
If indicator lamp 2 is not lit:
limbs could become trapped. Setting the raised level
The vehicle is set to the normal
 Start the engine. height.
If the indicator lamp is not lit:
 Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The ve-
hicle is adjusted to the raised level.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 249


Controls in detail
Driving systems

! ADS automatically regulates the sus- The switch is located on the lower sec-
pension as appropriate to particular tion of the centre console.
The "Raised level" setting is can-
driving conditions. Parallel to this, the
celled at vehicle speeds above
spring stiffness switches between com-
75 mph (120 km/h) or if the speed
fort and sports levels.
has been between 50 mph and
70 mph (80 km/h and 120 km/h) The damping/spring settings are de-
for more than about 5 minutes. The pendent on: P 32.32-2034-31
Level selec. cancelled  your driving style
message appears in the multi-func-
 the road-surface conditions
tion display.
 your individual selection
If you do not drive within this speed
range, the raised level remains Your selection remains stored even if
stored, even when the key is re- you remove the key from the ignition
1 To select the damping program
moved from the ignition lock. lock.
2 Indicator lamps
Comfort/sports tuning i  Start the engine.
The vehicle level is lowered by
Airmatic DC (dual control) consists of
15 mm in the sports damping pro- Sports tuning I
two components:
gram.
 Press button 1 once.
 Adaptive damping system (ADS)
One indicator lamp lights up.
 Spring stiffness adjustment

250 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Sports tuning II Permanent four-wheel drive i


 Press button 1 twice. (4MATIC)* In winter conditions, the maximum
Two indicator lamps light up. 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are effect of 4MATIC can only be
permanently driven. Together with ESP achieved if you use winter tyres
( page 78) it improves your vehicle's (M+S tyres), with snow chains if nec-
Comfort tuning
traction if a drive wheel starts spinning essary.
 Press button 1 repeatedly until in-
due to poor roadholding.
dicator lamps 2 go out.
Parktronic system* (PTS)
i Risk of accident G
A message appears in the multi- Risk of accident G
function display for five seconds  Only depress the accelerator
once you have activated the damp- pedal as far as necessary when PTS is only an aid and may not de-
ing program. pulling away. tect all obstacles. It does not relieve
 Accelerate less when driving. you of the responsibility to pay at-
 Adapt your driving style to suit tention.
P54.30-6810-31 road and traffic conditions. You are always responsible for safe-
4MATIC cannot reduce the risk of an ty and must continue to pay atten-
accident if you drive too fast. tion to your immediate surroundings
when parking and manoeuvring.
Otherwise you could endanger your-
self and others.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 251


Controls in detail
Driving systems

PTS monitors the area around your ve-


Risk of injury G hicle using six sensors in the front
bumper and four sensors in the rear
bumper. P54.65-2446-31
Make sure that no persons or ani-
mals are in the manoeuvring range.
Otherwise they could be injured.

PTS is an electronic parking assistance P 54.65-2444-31


system and informs you visually and au-
dibly of the distance between your vehi-
cle and an obstacle. Saloon (side view)
PTS is automatically activated when
you switch on the ignition and release
the parking brake. PTS switches off at
speeds exceeding 10 mph (18 km/h). 1 Sensors in the front bumper P54.65-2674-31
PTS switches back on at lower speeds.
Range of the sensors
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice
and slush otherwise they may not func-
tion correctly. Clean the sensors regu-
larly, taking care not to scratch or
damage them.
Saloon (top view)

252 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Front sensors Minimum distance

Centre approximately 100 cm Centre approximately 20 cm


P54.65-2559-31
Corners approximately 120 cm Corners approximately 15 cm

Rear sensors If there is an obstacle within this range,


all the warning lamps light up and a sig-
Centre approximately 120 cm nal sounds. If your vehicle's distance
falls below the minimum distance, the
Corners approximately 80 cm
distance may no longer be shown.
Estate (side view) ! Warning displays
Pay particular attention to objects
The warning displays show the distance
above or below sensors when park-
between the sensor and the obstacle.
ing, such as flower pots or trailer
P54.65-2675-31 The warning display for the front area is
towbars. PTS does not detect such
located on the instrument panel above
objects when they are in the imme-
the centre air vents. The warning dis-
diate vicinity of the vehicle. You
play for the rear area is at the rear in the
could damage your vehicle or the ob-
roof lining.
jects.
Ultrasonic sources such as a lorry's
compressed-air brakes or a pneu-
matic drill could cause PTS to mal-
Estate (top view) function.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 253


Controls in detail
Driving systems

! Automatic transmission*
If only the red segments are lit in all
Selector lever in Warning display
the warning displays, there is a mal-
function. D Front area acti-
P 54.65-2445-31
vated
Your direction of travel determines R or N Front and rear
which warning display is activated: areas activated
Manual transmission P No areas activat-
ed
Gear lever in Warning display
Front area warning display One or more segments light up as the
Forward gear, Front area acti-
1 Left side of the vehicle neutral vated vehicle approaches an obstacle, de-
2 Right side of the vehicle pending on the vehicle's distance from
Reverse gear Front and rear
the obstacle. A warning signal also
The warning display for each side of the areas activated
sounds for approximately 3 seconds
vehicle is divided into six yellow and
once the first red segment has lit up.
two red segments. If the first yellow
This means that the vehicle's distance
segment lights up dimly, PTS is ready.
to the obstacle is about to fall below the
minimum distance.

254 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Driving systems

Activating/deactivating Deactivating Parktronic Trailer towing


Parktronic  Press button 1. When you attach a trailer, Parktronic is
You can deactivate Parktronic manual- Indicator lamp 2 lights up. deactivated for the rear area as soon as
ly. you have established an electrical con-
nection between your vehicle and the
The switch is located on the lower sec- Activating Parktronic
trailer.
tion of the centre console.
 Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
!
Remove the ball coupling if the trail-
er tow hitch is not required. The
P 54.65-2583-31 minimum detection range of PTS to
an obstacle refers to the bumper,
not the ball coupling.

1 To activate/deactivate Parktronic
2 Indicator lamp

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 255


Controls in detail
Loading

Roof rack* ! Saloon


Mercedes-Benz recommends that
Risk of accident G you only use roof rack systems
which have been tested and ap-
proved for Mercedes-Benz. This P 77.40-2041-31
Observe the:
helps to prevent damage to the ve-
 maximum roof load of 100 kg hicle.
 the manufacturer's installation Position the load on the roof rack in
instructions such a way that the vehicle is not
An incorrectly secured roof rack or damaged during the journey.
load could work loose. Make sure that:
 you can raise the sliding/ 1 Cover (Saloon)
i tilting* sunroof fully  Fold covers 1 upwards.
Mercedes-Benz recommends roof  you can open the boot lid/  Only secure the roof rack to the an-
racks which have been specially de- tailgate and the panorama slid- chorage points under covers 1.
veloped and tested. ing sunroof* fully
Comply with the manufacturer's in-
These roof racks comply with DIN
stallation instructions.
standard 75302 and are additionally Estate
subjected to crash and durability  Only secure the roof rack to the
tests. roof rails.
Comply with the manufacturer's in-
stallation instructions.

256 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

Skibag* Unfolding the skibag

Risk of injury G P 91.12-2320-31


E2_F1
The skibag is designed to carry up to
four pairs of skis. Do not use the B13+5_P91.12-2605-31
skibag to carry any other type of
load.
The skibag must always be secured
when laden. Otherwise injuries 1 Skibag
could be caused by it in the event of  Unfold skibag 1 by pulling it into
1 Cover
an accident. the vehicle interior.
 Fold the rear seat armrest down.
 Push release catches 2 together
and fold cover 1 downwards.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 257


Controls in detail
Loading

E2_F1 E2_F1 E2_F1


B13+6_P91.12-2606-31 B13+8_P91.12-2608-31 B13+7_P91.12-2607-31

Illustration shows Saloon Skibag 1 Strap


1 Button  Push the skis into the skibag from  Pull strap 1 tight by the loose end
the boot/luggage compartment. until the skis are fixed in the skibag.
 Open the boot lid/tailgate.
 Press button 1.
The flap opens downwards.

258 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

Removing the skis and folding up i


the skibag
Saloon:
E2_F1  Loosen the two straps.
You should always close the flap in
B13+9_P91.12-2609-31  Unhook the hooks on the strap. the boot if you do not require the
 Take the skis out of the skibag. skibag. This prevents unauthorised
access from the vehicle interior to
 Close the flap in the boot/luggage
the boot.
compartment.
 Pull the skibag so that it is smooth
and fold it together.
1 Hook
 Stow the skibag in the rear seat
2 Bar
backrest.
 Engage hook 1 onto bar 2.
 Fold the cover upwards.
 Pull the strap tight by the loose end.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 259


Controls in detail
Loading

Removing the skibag  Open the boot lid/tailgate.


Luggage net in the
The skibag can be removed for cleaning  Press button 1. front-passenger footwell
or drying. Flap 2 opens downwards.
 Press catch 3 in and pull out frame
4 with the skibag.
P 68.00-2807-31
E2_F1
i
B13+10_P91.12-2610-31
You can also remove the skibag if
you have folded the rear seat back-
rest forwards.

Risk of poisoning G
1 Button
Saloon:
Risk of injury G
2 Flap
3 Catch When the skibag has been removed, Only place light loads in the luggage
4 Skibag frame always drive with the boot lid net. Do not transport heavy, sharp-
closed. Exhaust fumes could other- edged or fragile objects in the lug-
wise get into the vehicle interior. gage net. The luggage net cannot
secure loads sufficiently in an acci-
dent.

260 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

Loading guidelines
Risk of poisoning G
Risk of injury G Keep the tailgate closed while the
P 00.01-2382-31
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise ex-
Secure and position the load as de-
haust fumes could get into the vehi-
scribed in the loading guidelines.
cle interior and poison you.
Otherwise vehicle occupants could
be injured by the load being thrown The handling characteristics of a laden
around in the event of sharp brak- vehicle are dependent on the distribu-
ing, a sudden change in direction or tion of the load within the vehicle. You Distribution of the load within the
an accident. This also applies to should therefore load your vehicle as vehicle, Estate
seats which have been removed. shown in the illustrations.
You will find further information in
the "Securing a load" section
( page 262). P 00.01-2131-31
Even if you follow all the loading
guidelines, the load will increase the
risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent.

Distribution of the load within the


vehicle, Saloon

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 261


Controls in detail
Loading

i  Secure the load with sufficient- Securing a load


Observe the following notes when ly strong and wear-resistant
transporting a load: load restraints. Pad sharp edg- Lashing eyelets
es for protection.
 On no account should the max-
imum permissible gross vehicle Load restraints are available at any
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Risk of injury G
weight or the permissible axle
loads for the vehicle be exceed- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Spread the load evenly between the
ed due to the payload, including lashing eyelets. Observe the loading
occupants.
guidelines ( page 261).
 Position heavy loads as far for-
wards in the luggage compart- Observe the following notes on secur-
ment as possible, and as low as ing loads:
possible.
 Secure the load using the securing
 The load must not protrude be- eyelets.
yond the upper edge of the
backrests.  Do not use elastic straps or nets to
secure a load as these are only in-
 Always place the load against tended as an anti-slip protection for
the front or rear seat backrests. light loads.
 Only load the additional loading  Do not route lashing materials over
floor in the boot to a maximum sharp edges or corners.
of 20 kg.
 Pad sharp edges for protection.

262 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

Boot/luggage compartment Rear bench seat


There are four lashing eyelets in the There is a lashing eyelet on each side in
boot/luggage compartment. P 68.00-3237-31 the footwell underneath the rear bench
seat.

P 68.00-2810-31
P 68.00-2809-31

Estate
1 Lashing eyelets

Saloon
1 Lashing eyelet in the rear footwell
1 Lashing eyelets

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 263


Controls in detail
Loading

Through-loading feature in
the rear bench seat* (Saloon) Risk of poisoning G
The left and right rear seats can be fold-
Always drive with the boot lid P 91.12-2385-31
ed down to increase the boot capacity.
closed. Exhaust fumes could other-
The folding front-passenger seat* can wise get into the vehicle interior.
also be folded down ( page 272) and
the rear bench seat cushions can be re-
moved ( page 267) if you are carrying Folding the rear bench seat
a long load. forward
! 1 Release
Risk of injury G The seat cushion must always be re-
leased and folded up before the i
Do not carry heavy or hard objects backrest is folded forward. Other- If tall persons have occupied the
inside the vehicle or in the boot un- wise the backrest upholstery could driver's or front-passenger seat, it
less they are secured. Vehicle occu- be damaged. may be necessary to move the seats
pants could be injured by objects forwards slightly to fold the back-
being thrown around in the vehicle rests forward.
in the event of:
 Pull release 1.
 sharp braking
The seat cushion springs upwards a
 a change of direction or little.
 an accident

264 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

i !
If persons are to travel on the cen- Before folding the left backrest for-
P 91.12-2333-31 tre rear seat, it may be necessary wards, make sure that the centre
to: seat belt buckle is located under
 push the centre seat belt buck- the right backrest.
le inwards while tilting the right Otherwise the seat belt buckle or
backrest forwards the backrest could be damaged.
or
 if the right backrest has already
1 Seat cushion been tilted forwards, fold the
2 Backrest centre seat belt buckle back up
 Grasp seat cushion 1 from behind
and fold it forward. i
You can also remove the seat cush-
ion ( page 267).

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 265


Controls in detail
Loading

!  Swing seat cushion 1 to the rear


and press the front edge down from
Make sure that the head restraints
the centre until you hear it engage.
P 91.12-2334-31 fit fully in the seat cushion pockets.
This prevents damage to the back-  Fold up the head restraints if neces-
rests while loading. sary and adjust them ( page 110).

Folding the rear bench seat back Risk of injury G


Make sure that the rear seat back-
rest and the seat cushions are fully
 Open the boot. P 91.12-2335-31 locked in place.
 Pull the left or right release handle
on the backrest.
The backrest is released and the
head restraints fold back.
 Fold backrest 2 forward.

1 Seat cushion
2 Backrest
 Swing backrest 2 to the rear until
it engages.

266 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

Removing the seat cushion ! !


You can achieve a larger, flat loading On vehicles with seat heating in the Leave the seat cushion hinge in this
area by removing the rear bench seat rear*, the electrical contact on the position. If you fold it back, you
cushions. underside of the cushion must be could damage the upholstery.
 Fold down the seat cushions disconnected before removing the
( page 264). seat cushion.

 Remove the head restraints


 Press the connection* together on
( page 110). the upper part of the lengthwise
side and pull out seat heating con- P 91.12-2336-31
nector 2 from the seat cushion.

i
P 91.12-2388-31 Join the connections for the seat
heating, making sure the connector
clicks into place, when replacing
the cushion.  Fold the backrest forwards
( page 264).
 Pull seat cushion release lever 1
and remove the seat cushion up-
1 Release bar wards.
2 Connector for seat heating*

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 267


Controls in detail
Loading

Enlarging the luggage Folding the rear bench seat


compartment (Estate) Risk of injury G forward
The left and right rear seats can be fold-
Do not carry heavy or hard objects
ed down to increase the luggage com-
partment capacity. inside the vehicle or in the luggage
compartment unless they are se-
If the combined luggage cover and net P 91.12-2490-31
cured. Vehicle occupants could be
with the luggage compartment cover
injured by objects being thrown
and the safety net is fitted, you can:
around in the vehicle in the event of:
 only fold the right backrest forward
individually  sharp braking
 fold both backrests forward if you  a change of direction or
fold the right backrest forward first  an accident
1 Seat cushion release handle
If you enlarge the luggage compart- 2 Seat cushion
ment, you must always fold the seat
cushions forward and attach the i
safety net ( page 274). If tall persons have occupied the
driver's or front-passenger seat, it
may be necessary to move the seats
Risk of poisoning G forwards slightly to fold the back-
rests forward.
Always drive with the tailgate
closed. Exhaust fumes could other-
wise get into the vehicle interior.

268 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

 Pull seat cushion release handle


i
1.
If persons are to travel on the cen-
The seat cushion is unlocked. tre rear seat, it may be necessary
P91.12-2492-31
 Fold seat cushion 2 up. to:
 push the centre seat belt buck-
i le inwards while tilting the right
You can also remove the seat cush- backrest forwards
ion ( page 270).
or
 if the right backrest has already
been tilted forwards, fold the 1 Backrest release lever
centre seat belt buckle back up 2 Backrest
F2_F1  Pull left or right release lever 1 up.
B13+12_P91.12-2611-31
! The appropriate backrest is un-
Before folding the left backrest for- locked.
wards, make sure that the centre
 Fold the backrest forward.
seat belt buckle is located under
the right backrest.
Otherwise the seat belt buckle or
1 Retainer for the seat belt the backrest could be damaged.
 Guide the seat belt into retainer 1.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 269


Controls in detail
Loading

Folding the rear bench seat back !


Risk of injury G On vehicles with seat heating in the
rear*, the electrical contact on the
Make sure that the rear seat back- underside of the cushion must be
rest and the seat cushions are fully disconnected before removing the
locked in place. seat cushion.
P91.12-2489-31
Removing the seat cushion  Press the connection* together on
the upper part of the lengthwise
You can achieve a larger, flat loading
side and pull out seat heating con-
area by removing the rear bench seat
nector 2 from the seat cushion.
cushions.
1 Seat cushion  Fold down the seat cushions i
2 Backrest ( page 270). Join the connections for the seat
 Swing backrest 2 to the rear until heating, making sure the connector
it engages. clicks into place, when replacing
the cushion.
 Swing seat cushion 1 to the rear
and press down from the rear until
it engages. P91.12-2488-31
 Fold up the head restraints if neces-
sary and adjust them ( page 110).

1 Release handle
2 Connector for seat heating*

270 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

 Pull seat cushion release lever 1 Adjusting the backrest position  Pull release lever 1 on the right-
and remove the seat cushion up- hand seat upwards and fold the
wards. backrest forwards.
 Once the backrest is disengaged,
!
pull release lever 1 upwards again.
Leave the seat cushion hinge in this P91.12-2492-31
position. If you fold it back, you  Pull release lever 1 on the left-
could damage the upholstery. hand seat upwards and fold the
backrest forwards.
 Once the backrest is disengaged,
pull release lever 1 upwards again.
 Fold back the backrest for the left-
1 Backrest release lever hand seat until it engages.
P91.12-2494-31 2 Backrest  Fold back the backrest for the right-
hand seat until it engages.
i
You can adjust the backrests to a The backrests are now in the sec-
second, upright position. This cre- ond position.
ates a larger load capacity where
 Fold the backrest forwards
necessary or greater seating com-
( page 268). fort on the folding bench seat.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 271


Controls in detail
Loading

Folding front-passenger seat


backrest* (Saloon)

Folding down the front-passen- P 91.10-2369-31


P91.10-2488-31
ger seat backrest
When folding down the front-passenger
seat backrest you must:
 insert the head restraint fully
 position the backrest upright
 tilt the seat cushion downwards 1 Release 2 Handle
( page 34)  Press the right-hand side of release  Grasp handle 2 and pull the re-
 use fore-and-aft adjustment to 1. lease to the stop.
push the seat into a central position The handle folds out. The front-passenger seat backrest
 remove objects from the seat sur- is released and can be folded for-
face ward.

!
Do not place heavy objects on the
front-passenger seat. These could
cause the front-passenger airbag
and the front-passenger sidebag to
be triggered in an accident.

272 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

 Push the backrest down.


Risk of injury G  Press the right-hand side of release
1.
Make sure that nobody is sitting on
P 91.10-2370-31  Grasp the handle and pull the re-
the right-hand or middle seat of the lease to the stop.
rear bench seat when folding down
 Pull the backrest back to its original
the front-passenger seat.
position using release handle 1.
Occupants on these seats could oth-
Keep pulling the handle until the
erwise be injured. seat backrest is positioned almost
to the vertical.
 Fold the backrest fully forward. Folding the front-passenger seat  Push the backrest into its initial po-
 Press the backrest lightly down- back sition.
wards until it is resting on the seat
cushion.
Risk of injury G
P 91.10-2371-31
When folding the front-passenger
seat backrest back up, make sure
that it has engaged and is properly
locked in place.

1 Release

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 273


Controls in detail
Loading

Luggage cover and safety net Safety net


(Estate)
The luggage cover and the safety net Risk of injury G
are attached to the rear bench seat
P68.50-3252-31
backrest as a combined luggage cover The safety net cannot secure heavy
and net. loads. You should therefore always
lash down the load.
You could otherwise be injured by
objects which have not been suffi-
ciently secured being thrown around 1 Safety net
in the event of sharp braking, a sud- 2 Safety net retainers
den change of direction or an acci-
 Pull safety net 1 upwards and
dent. hook it into retainers 2.

i
You can also use the safety net
when the rear seat backrest is fold-
ed down. In this case, you should
hook the safety net into the front
retainers.

274 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

Luggage cover Removing the combined luggage


The luggage cover is released automat- cover and net
ically when the tailgate is opened/  Roll up the safety net and luggage
closed, and is automatically raised/ cover 1.
lowered. P68.00-3253-31
 Fold the rear seat cushion forward
! ( page 270).
While loading the vehicle, make  Fold the rear seat backrest forward
sure that the boot is not loaded ( page 268).
above the lower edge of the side  Push the combined luggage cover
windows. and net to the left and out of the re-
1 Luggage cover
Otherwise the combined luggage tainers on the rear seat backrest
cover and net could be damaged and remove it.
Rolling up the luggage cover
when the tailgate is closed.
 Unhook luggage cover 1 from the
It is therefore not necessary to roll up retainers on the left and right.
the luggage cover before loading and  Slowly guide luggage cover 1 back
unloading the vehicle. to the stop.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 275


Controls in detail
Loading

Easy-Pack system* (Estate) Inserting the mountings in the i


load rail You can turn the mounting in the
Easy-Pack fix kit* load rail to four different positions:
The Easy-Pack fix kit is supplied with To lock the mounting.
the accessories enabling the luggage
compartment to be used in various To release the lashing eye-
ways. You can store the fix kit in the let, the belt reel or the tele-
wallet provided. P68.00-3197-31 scopic rod.
To remove the mounting.
i
In vehicles with a stowage box* in To push the mounting to
the luggage compartment, you can the next detent.
keep the wallet and the telescopic
rod in the stowage box. 1 Load rail  Turn mounting 2 to .
2 Mounting
 Insert mounting 2 in load rail 1.
You can slide the mounting element in
the load rail to various detents and se-
cure it. These detents are marked and
positioned along the load rail at 5-cm
intervals.

P68.00-3196-31

1 Load rails

276 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

 Turn the mounting until it engages Belt reel


. Risk of injury G
You must feel the mounting clearly
engage in the load rail. Spread the load evenly between the
lashing eyelets. Observe the loading
Inserting the lashing eyelet in the guidelines ( page 261).
mounting P68.00-3251-31
 Turn mounting 2 in the load rail to
.
 Insert lashing eyelet 1 in mounting
2.
 Turn mounting 2 in the load rail 1 Belt reel
P68.00-3250-31
until it engages . 2 Mounting
You must feel the mounting clearly 3 Locking button
engage in the load rail.
i
The belt reel can be used to secure
light loads against the side wall of
1 Lashing eyelet
the luggage compartment to pre-
2 Mounting
vent them from moving around.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 277


Controls in detail
Loading

 Insert two mountings 2 in a load  Press belt reel locking button 3 !


rail. and with the other hand extend the
On vehicles with an Easy-Pack lug-
 Turn mountings 2 in the load rail
net slowly around the load until it is
gage compartment floor*, the tele-
to . secure.
scopic rod must be removed before
 Insert belt reel 1 in mountings 2. the luggage compartment floor is
Telescopic rod extended. You could otherwise
 Turn mountings 2 in the load rail
damage the telescopic rod.
until they engage .
You must feel the mounting clearly  Insert a mounting 2 in each load
engage in the load rail. rail.
 Press belt reel locking button 3  Turn mountings 2 in the load rail
and pull the safety net in the direc- P68.00-3198-31
to .
tion of the arrow.
 Insert telescopic rod 1 in the
 Place the load between the secur- mountings.
ing net and the luggage compart-
 Turn mounting 2 in the load rail
ment side wall.
until it engages .
1 Telescopic rod
You must feel the mounting clearly
2 Mounting
engage in the load rail.
i
The telescopic rod can be used to
secure the load against the rear
seats to prevent it from moving
around.

278 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

Easy-Pack stowage box*  Fold back backrests 3


( page 268).

Risk of injury G i
E2_F1 Stowage box 1 is also restricted
When you are using the stowage box from above by the combined lug-
B13+13_P68.00-3457-31
in the luggage compartment, the gage cover and net.
backrests of the seats directly in
front of it must be fully engaged to Loading the stowage box
the rear and the combined luggage  Fold backrest 3 forwards
cover and net must be fitted. ( page 268).
1 Stowage box
The maximum stowage box load is 2 Luggage compartment floor  Load stowage box 1 through the
20 kg. A greater load could other- 3 Rear seat backrests opening on the front.
wise come loose in the event of an 4 Catches
accident or sudden or sharp brak- i
ing, and could injure you or other Installing the stowage box Stowage box 1 in the luggage
occupants. compartment is locked by the rear
 Fold both backrests 3 forwards
bench seat and can carry a maxi-
( page 268).
mum load of 20 kg.
 Guide stowage box 1 into the lug-
gage compartment through a rear  Fold back backrests 3
door with the opening facing the di- ( page 268).
rection of travel.
 Press stowage box 1 catches 4
into the gap between backrest 3
and luggage compartment floor 2.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 279


Controls in detail
Loading

Removing the stowage box Extending the luggage compart-  Press luggage compartment floor
 Fold both backrests 3 forwards ment floor switch 1 beyond the pressure
( page 268). point and release it.
 Push stowage box 1 forwards and The luggage compartment floor ex-
out of the mountings using catches tends continuously until it reaches
4. its end position.
P68.00-3255-31
 Remove stowage box 1 sideways i
through a rear door.
The luggage compartment floor can
 Fold back backrests 3 bear a maximum load of 200 kg. On
( page 268). gradients of 15% or more, the max-
imum load is 150 kg.
Extending/retracting the Easy-
Pack luggage compartment floor Luggage compartment floor switch
automatically*
1 To extend the luggage compart-
The automatically extending luggage ment floor
compartment floor makes it easier for
you to load and unload the vehicle.  Press luggage compartment floor
switch 1. E2_F1
! The luggage compartment floor ex- P68.00-3448-31
On vehicles with an Easy-Pack lug- tends until you release the switch
gage compartment floor*, the tele- or until it reaches its end position.
scopic rod must be removed from
or
the loading package before the lug-
1 Luggage compartment floor
gage compartment floor is extend-
ed. You could otherwise damage
the telescopic rod.

280 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Loading

i !  Press luggage compartment floor


switch 1.
In its extended position, the lug- When retracting the luggage com-
gage compartment floor completely partment floor, make sure that The luggage compartment floor re-
covers the bumper. This enables there are no objects in the luggage tracts until you release the switch
you to avoid damaging the paint- compartment floor guides or be- or until it reaches its end position.
work when loading the vehicle. tween the luggage compartment
floor and the rear seat. i
Retracting the luggage compart- Do not place anything in the lug- Observe the notes in the "Securing
gage compartment floor retrac- a load" section when transporting a
ment floor
tion/extension area. The luggage load ( page 262).
compartment floor could otherwise
Risk of injury G be damaged. !
Make sure that the combined lug-
Make sure that nobody can be
gage cover and net is rolled up
trapped as you retract the luggage when the luggage compartment
compartment floor. If danger threat- floor is retracted.
ens, release the switch or press it
Otherwise the combined luggage
again. E2_F1 cover and net could be damaged
Under no circumstances may chil- when the tailgate is closed.
B13+15_P68.00-3447-31
dren or other people be sitting on
the luggage compartment floor or in
the area of movement of the lug-
gage compartment floor as it is re-
tracted and extended. They could be Luggage compartment floor switch
trapped during the closing proce- 1 To retract the luggage compart-
dure. ment floor

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 281


Controls in detail
Features

The glove compartment can be locked Stowage compartment in the


Stowage compartments
and unlocked with the emergency key. centre console
Risk of injury G Opening the glove compartment
 Press button 1.
The stowage compartments must be P 54.25-3162-31
closed when items are stored in The glove compartment folds down.
them. Otherwise the items could fall
out and injure the vehicle occupants Closing the glove compartment
in the event of sharp braking.  Fold the cover upwards.

Glove compartment Opening the spectacles/mobile


phone compartment
1 Opening button
 Briefly press compartment 2.
The spectacles/mobile phone i
compartment opens. If the cassette compartment is
P 68.00-2822-31
open, the stowage compartment in
Closing the spectacles/mobile the centre console cannot be
phone compartment opened.
 Push spectacles/mobile phone
 Press opening button 1.
compartment 2 in until it engages.
The touch panel swings upwards
1 To open and the stowage compartment is
2 Spectacles/mobile phone com- extended.
partment

282 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Features

i Cup holder* in the centre


Do not place any essential medica- console
tion in the stowage compartment, P 68.00-2824-31
since it will not open if there is a
power failure.
P 68.20-2746-31
Stowage compartment in front
of the armrest

1 Handle
P 68.00-2823-31
Removing the insert  Briefly press the marking on the cup
 Pull out the insert by handle 1. holder.
The cup holder slides out automati-
cally.

i
You can remove the cup holder to
Opening clean it. You should clean the cup
holder with clean, lukewarm water
 Briefly press the marking at the rear
only. When reinserting the cup hold-
of the cover.
er, make sure that you insert it into
The cover opens. the guides.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 283


Controls in detail
Features

Stowage compartment under


Risk of injury G the armrest
P 68.20-2747-31
Keep the cup holder closed while
the vehicle is in motion. Do not
place anything in the cup holder P 68.00-2825-31
while the vehicle is in motion. Other-
wise vehicle occupants could be in-
jured by objects being thrown
around if you:
1 Left-hand cup holder  brake sharply
2 Right-hand cup holder
 change direction suddenly
1 Stowage compartment
 have an accident
2 Stowage tray
Only use the cup holders for con-
tainers of the right size and which Opening the stowage tray
have lids. Otherwise the drinks
 Pull handle 2.
could spill.
Cup holders should not be used for
Opening the stowage compart-
hot drinks. Otherwise you may scald
ment
yourself.
 Pull handle 1.

284 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Features

Ventilating the stowage compart- i Ruffled pockets


ment Close the air vent during heating
The stowage compartment under the mode if you are transporting heat-
armrest can be ventilated. The air tem- sensitive goods (e.g. food) in the
perature corresponds roughly to that stowage compartment.
around the centre air vents.
P 68.00-2827-31
The slide is located in the stowage com- Stowage compartment in the
partment. centre console at the rear

P 68.00-2978-31 P 68.00-2826-31 There are ruffled pockets on the back of


the front seats.

Risk of injury G
Do not carry hard objects in the ruf-
fled pockets. Objects must not pro-
1 Slide  Briefly press the top of the com- trude over the top of the ruffled
partment. pockets.
 Pull the slide upwards.
The compartment opens automati-
The stowage space is ventilated.
cally.
 Push the slide downwards.
Ventilation of the stowage compart-
ment is switched off.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 285


Controls in detail
Features

Stowage well in the rear seat Rear cup holder Cup holder in the rear seat arm-
armrest rest
Risk of injury G
Keep the cup holder closed while
P 68.00-2828-31 the vehicle is in motion. Do not P 68.00-2830-31
place anything in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. Other-
wise vehicle occupants could be in-
jured by objects being thrown
around if you:
 brake sharply
 Push the handle upwards and fold  Press the front of the cup holder.
the armrest up.  change direction suddenly
The cup holder slides out automati-
 have an accident cally.
i
Only use the cup holders for con-
The Owner's Manual and Service
tainers of the right size and which
Booklet are stored in the stowage
compartment. have lids. Otherwise the drinks
could spill.
Cup holders should not be used for
hot drinks. Otherwise you may scald
yourself.

286 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Features

Cup holder in the folding bench Ashtray Replacing the insert


seat*  Press the insert into the holder until
it clicks into place.

i
P 68.00-2831-31 The ashtray may also be used as a
P 68.00-3184-31
stowage compartment. A rubber in-
sert is located in the glove compart-
ment for this purpose. This can be
inserted into the compartment in-
stead of the ashtray insert.

1 Cover
 Press the front of the cup holder to 2 Sliding knob
release it.
 Pull the cup holder to the stop. Opening the ashtray
P 68.00-2833-31
 Briefly press the marking on the
bottom of cover 1.
The ashtray opens.

Removing the insert


 Move sliding knob 2 to the right.
The ashtray insert slides out slight-
ly.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 287


Controls in detail
Features

Opening the rear ashtray 12-V socket


 Briefly press on the top of the ash- Risk of injury and fire G The socket is located in the rear com-
tray. partment in the centre console stowage
Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by compartment.
It folds out.
its knob. Otherwise you might burn
Cigarette lighter yourself.
Remove the cigarette lighter if chil-
dren are travelling with you. They P 54.10-2136-31
could injure themselves on a hot cig-
P 68.00-2834-31 arette lighter or start a fire.

If the socket it locked:


 Turn the locking mechanism anti-
1 Cigarette lighter clockwise with a coin, for example,
and fold the cover up.
 Switch on the ignition.
The socket can be used for accessories
 Press cigarette lighter 1 in.
with a maximum power consumption of
The cigarette lighter will pop out au- 180 watts.
tomatically when the heating ele-
ment is red-hot. i
Estates have an additional socket
on the left in the luggage compart-
ment.

288 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Features

Steering wheel heating* Switching on Mobile phone*


The steering wheel heating operating  Make sure that the key is at least in
lever is located to the bottom left of the position 1. Risk of accident G
steering column.  Turn the lever in the direction of
arrow 1. Only use the mobile phone when
The steering wheel becomes warm. road and traffic conditions permit. If
Indicator lamp 3 lights up. you are not using the hands-free de-
P 54.25-2753-31 vice, stop the vehicle in a suitable
Switching off place if you wish to make a phone
call.
 Turn the lever in the direction of
arrow 2. A mobile phone operated in the
The steering wheel heating is vehicle:
switched off. Indicator lamp 3  without an external aerial
goes out.
1 To switch on the steering wheel  without an aerial installed in
heating i such a way that it is reflection-
2 To switch off the steering wheel free
The steering wheel heating does not
heating switch off automatically.  with an incorrectly fitted exter-
3 Indicator lamp nal aerial
could interfere with the vehicle's
electronics and thereby impair the
correct operation of the vehicle and
your safety. Health risks may also
occur due to the excessive electro-
magnetic radiation.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 289


Controls in detail
Features

For this reason, only have the exter- i


nal aerial fitted at a qualified special- The Nokia 6310i is only fully func-
ist workshop which has the neces- tional if your vehicle was supplied
with the appropriate control unit for P 82.70-4449-31
sary specialist knowledge and tools
this mobile phone. If you have this
to carry out the work required.
version, you can also use the follow-
Mercedes-Benz recommends a ing mobile phones:
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
Nokia 5110, Nokia 5130,
this purpose. In particular, work rel-
Nokia 6110, Nokia 6130,
evant to safety or on safety-related
Nokia 6150, Nokia 6210,
systems must be carried out at a Nokia 6310. 1 To lift the cradle and engage the
qualified specialist workshop. mobile phone
Mobile phone in the armrest 2 Retaining lugs
A telephone bracket is available in the 3 Bracket
armrest for the Nokia 6310i. Inserting a mobile phone in the 4 Cradle
telephone bracket  Press bracket 3 downwards briefly
in the direction of arrow 1.
 Open the stowage well in the arm-
rest ( see page 284). Cradle 4 is folded up.
 Remove the round cover on the  Push the mobile phone at the bot-
back of the mobile phone. tom and guide it into lugs 2 in tel-
ephone bracket 3.

290 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Features

 Press the mobile phone downwards i Own number sending:


briefly in the direction of arrow 1.
When you remove the key from the The hands-free system does not
The cradle folds downwards. Press
ignition lock, the mobile phone re- recognise whether own number
on the phone again until it engages
mains switched on for approximate- sending is enabled or disabled in
in the sides of telephone bracket
ly ten minutes (run-on time). If you the mobile phone. The phone
3.
make a call during this time, the number is therefore always sent by
The mobile phone is connected to mobile phone will be switched off default.
the hands-free device and the mul- approximately ten minutes after
ti-function steering wheel. By creating an additional phone
you have hung up.
book entry on the SIM card, you can
The battery is charged depending Run-on time: switch the own number sending
on the charge status and the posi- function on or off:
You can change the run-on time by
tion of the key in the ignition lock.
making an additional phone book For the name, enter "CALLID" and
The charge status is shown in the
entry on the SIM card. for the number, enter a "0" or a "1".
mobile phone display.
For the name, enter "Nachlaufzeit" Entering:
i (run-on time) and for the number,  "0" will prevent the phone
Depending on the mobile phone enter a figure between 1 and 30 number from being sent
setting, the system reads the phone (minutes). If you have not entered a
 "1" will allow the phone number
book stored on the SIM card or the number or have entered a different
to be sent
mobile phone memory. number, the run-on time of ten min-
utes will still apply. You can find out how to create a
You can make a call using the s and phone book entry in the mobile
You can find out how to create a
tbuttons on the multi-function phone operating instructions.
phone book entry in the mobile
steering wheel. You can control other phone operating instructions.
mobile phone functions via the operat-
ing system ( page 159).

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 291


Controls in detail
Features

Making a call using the telephone  Remove bracket 3 and the mobile i
bracket phone from the cradle.
The receiver function of the mobile
You can remove the mobile phone to- Making a phone call: phone is deactivated while the
gether with the telephone bracket and The telephone bracket contains a fully- phone is inserted in the telephone
make a call in this way. operative receiver with loudspeaker bracket. You can only make a phone
Removing the mobile phone with the and microphone. call via the telephone bracket re-
bracket: ceiver.

Inserting the mobile phone with the


telephone bracket:
P82.70-4353-31

P82.70-4450-31

P 82.70-4451-31

1 Loudspeaker
1 To lift the cradle 2 Microphone
2 Bracket  Make a phone call with the tele-
3 Cradle phone bracket as you would with a
1 To engage the bracket
 Press the front of the mobile phone telephone receiver.
2 Bracket
downwards briefly in the direction 3 To insert the bracket with the mo-
of arrow 1. bile phone
Cradle 1 is folded up. 4 Cradle

292 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Features

 Push bracket 2 with the mobile  Press the front of the mobile phone
TeleAid*
phone in the direction of arrow 3 downwards briefly in the direction
into cradle 4. of arrow 1. TeleAid has various functions:

 Press the front of the mobile phone Cradle 4 is folded up.  Emergency call system
downwards in the direction of arrow The system automatically makes an
 Press release button 2 and re- emergency call if you have a serious
1 until cradle 4 engages. move the mobile phone forwards accident in certain European coun-
out of bracket 3. tries. You can also initiate an emer-
Removing the mobile phone
 Press the front of bracket 3 down- gency call yourself by pressing the
from the telephone bracket emergency call switch.
wards in the direction of arrow 1
until cradle 4 engages. The system transmits data regard-
 Close the stowage compartment in ing the vehicle's position and the
the armrest. extent of the accident to the control
centre and establishes a connec-
P 82.70-4452-31 tion with this centre.
 Roadside assistance
The Mercedes-Benz breakdown
service assists you if you have tech-
nical problems with your vehicle,
e.g. if you have a flat tyre.
1 To lift the cradle and engage it
2 Release button
3 Bracket
4 Cradle

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 293


Controls in detail
Features

When you press the roadside as- When you press the Mercedes-Benz The indicator lamp in the emergency
sistance button, the system trans- Info button, the system transmits the call switch flashes until the emergency
mits the current vehicle position current vehicle position and the vehicle call is finished.
and the vehicle data to the data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer You will see the following messages in
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assist- Assistance Centre. The centre then es- the multi-function display:
ance Center. The centre then estab- tablishes a voice connection to your ve-
Emergency call
lishes a voice connection to your hicle.
Connecting call
vehicle.
Emergency call
 Mercedes-Benz Info Emergency call system Call connected
The Mercedes-Benz information It is only possible to make an automatic You will hear an announcement when
service helps you if you have ques- emergency call if the key is in position the emergency service centre has re-
tions about your vehicle, e.g.: 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The indicator ceived your emergency call.
 If you have questions about op- lamp in the emergency call switch lights  Wait until a connection is estab-
erating your vehicle up for approximately five seconds. lished with the emergency service
 If you require information about An emergency call is automatically initi- centre.
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and ated if:  Make your emergency call.
accessories  an airbag or a belt tensioner is trig-
gered i
 If you have queries concerning
Mercedes-Benz technology, You cannot make another call using
 the system detects that the vehicle
service and products the mobile phone during the emer-
has overturned
gency call process.
 If you have a complaint
If the indicator lamp is continuously lit
without a connection having been previ-
ously established, the system has not
been able to transmit an emergency
call.

294 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Features

You will see the following message in Initiating an emergency call  Press emergency call switch 1.
the multi-function display: manually The indicator lamp in the emergen-
Emergency call Call failed i cy call switch flashes.
You must then initiate your own rescue The key must not be in the ignition You will hear an announcement
measures. lock if you trigger an emergency call when the emergency service centre
manually. has received your emergency call.
Requirements  Wait until a connection is estab-
The emergency call system is a public
 TeleAid is available in the country in system. Any wrongful use of the emer- lished with the emergency service
which you are driving. gency call switch is therefore a punish- centre.
 A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre able offence.  Make your emergency call.
has put TeleAid into service.  Briefly press the cover of the emer-
gency call switch in the front of the When you have finished the emergency
 You are authorised to use TeleAid.
overhead control panel. call:
 An appropriate mobile phone net-
The cover opens.  Replace the cover on the emergen-
work is available with an SMS (text
cy call switch.
messaging) service.
 The vehicle can receive GPS sig-
nals.
P 82.00-2156-31
 The emergency call system is oper-
ational.
 The emergency call system re-
ceives sufficient current from the
vehicle battery.

1 Emergency call switch

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 295


Controls in detail
Features

Mercedes-Benz Info and road- Requesting Mercedes-Benz Info The call is finished. The service re-
side assistance mains connected for approximately
 Press Mercedes-Benz Info button
five minutes in order to transmit
The buttons are located in the mobile 1 until the call is connected.
any necessary data. You cannot
phone compartment. The Mercedes-Benz Customer As- make a phone call during this time.
sistance Center receives a short
However, if you wish to disconnect
message containing information
from the service immediately:
about your vehicle and its position.
 Press the t button on the
You will see the following messages
multi-function steering wheel or
P82.70-4045-31 in the multi-function display:
another mobile phone hang-up
Info Connecting call button again.
Info call Call connected
The voice connection is estab- Requesting roadside assistance
lished.  Press roadside assistance button
2 until the call is connected.
To hang up:
The Mercedes-Benz Customer As-
 Press the t button on the multi-
sistance Center receives a short
function steering wheel or another message containing information
mobile phone hang-up button. about your vehicle and its position.
1 Mercedes-Benz Info button
2 Roadside assistance button

296 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Features

You will see the following messages


Garage door opener*
in the multi-function display:
The remote control integrated in the
Roadside assistance rear-view mirror allows you to operate
Connecting call up to three different door and gate sys- P 68.00-2934-31
Roadside assistance tems.
Call connected
You can program the transmitter but-
The voice connection is estab- tons.
lished.
i
To hang up: The garage door opener is only avail-
 Press the t button on the multi- able for certain countries. Observe Remote control in the rear-view
function steering wheel or another the legal requirements in all coun- mirror
mobile phone hang-up button. tries concerned.
1 Transmitter button
The call is finished. The service re- It may not be possible to operate 2 Transmitter button
mains connected for approximately some garage door opening systems 3 Transmitter button
five minutes in order to transmit with the integrated remote control. 4 Indicator lamp
any necessary data. You cannot You can obtain detailed information
make a phone call during this time. from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
However, if you wish to disconnect
from the service immediately:
 Press the t button on the
multi-function steering wheel or
another mobile phone hang-up
button again.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 297


Controls in detail
Features

Indicator lamp 4 starts to flash af-  Keep the transmitter button on the
Risk of accident G ter a short while. It flashes about garage door remote control de-
once a second. pressed until indicator lamp 4
Only press the transmitter button on flashes rapidly.
the integrated remote control if
i
The programming was successful if
Indicator lamp 4 flashes immedi- indicator lamp 4 flashes rapidly.
there are no persons or objects
ately the first time the transmitter
present within the sweep of the ga- If indicator lamp 4 goes out after
button is programmed. If this trans-
rage door. Persons could otherwise mitter button has already been pro- approximately 20 seconds and did
be injured as the door moves. grammed, indicator lamp 4 will not flash rapidly before this:
only start flashing every second af-  Release the transmitter buttons
Programming the remote control ter 20 seconds have elapsed. on the integrated and portable
remote controls.
i  Continue to keep the transmitter  Repeat the programming pro-
You must clear the remote control button pressed. cedure and change the dis-
memory before programming the  Point the portable garage door re- tance between the portable
remote control for the first time mote control with the transmitter garage door remote control and
( page 299). towards the left-hand side of the the rear-view mirror.
rear-view mirror from a distance of  Release the transmitter buttons on
 Switch on the ignition. 5 to 20 cm. the integrated and portable remote
 Press one of transmitter buttons 1 controls.
to 3 on the integrated remote con- i
trol and keep it pressed. The required distance between the
portable garage door remote con-
trol and the rear-view mirror de-
pends on your garage door opening
system.

298 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Controls in detail
Features

i Opening/closing the garage i


door The transmitter will transmit a sig-
If the garage door system works with
a rolling code, after programming Once programmed, the integrated re- nal for as long as the transmitter
you must synchronise the remote mote control will assume the function button is being pressed. The trans-
control integrated in the rear-view of the garage door system's remote mission will be halted after a maxi-
mirror with the garage door system control. Please read the operating in- mum of 20 seconds and indicator
receiver. structions for the garage door system. lamp 4 will flash. Press the trans-
 Switch on the ignition.
mitter button again if necessary.
You will find further information in
the garage door opening system's  Press the transmitter button in the
operating instructions, e.g. the sec- Clearing the remote control
rear-view mirror which you have
tions on "Synchronising the trans- memory
programmed to operate the garage
mitter" or "Registering a new door concerned.  Switch on the ignition.
transmitter".
Garage door system with a fixed  Press and hold transmitter buttons
code: 1 and 3 for about 20 seconds un-
Indicator lamp 4 lights up perma- til indicator lamp 4 flashes rapidly.
nently. The memory is cleared.
Garage door system with a rolling
code: i
Indicator lamp 4 flashes for a brief You should clear the remote control
period and then lights up for ap- memory before selling the vehicle.
proximately two seconds. This is re-
peated for up to 20 seconds.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 299


Operation
The first 1,000 miles (1,500 km)

You will find detailed information about If you treat the engine with sufficient After 1,000 miles (1,500 km) you can
operating, maintaining and caring for care from the very start, it will reward gradually bring the vehicle up to full
your vehicle in the "Operation" section. you with excellent performance for a road and engine speed.
very long period afterwards.
 You should therefore drive at vary- Additional driving tips for AMG vehicles:
ing road and engine speeds for the  Do not drive faster than 85 mph
first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). (140 km/h) for the first
 Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
full throttle, during this time. Do not  Only bring the engine up to the
exceed 2/3 of the permitted maxi- maximum speed of 4,500 rpm for a
mum engine speed for each gear. brief period.
 Change gear in good time.
i
 Do not change down a gear manual- You should also observe these notes
ly in order to brake. if the engine or rear axle transmis-
Vehicles with automatic transmission*: sion on your vehicle has been re-
placed.
 Try to avoid depressing the acceler-
ator pedal beyond the pressure
point (kickdown).
 Use shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 for slow
driving only, for example in moun-
tainous terrain.

302 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Refuelling
 Refuelling
The fuel filler flap is unlocked and  Turn fuel filler cap 2 anti-clock-
Risk of explosion G locked automatically by the remote wise and remove it.
control or KEYLESS GO* when you  Insert fuel filler cap 2 into retainer
Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked open or close the vehicle. 3 on the inside of the fuel filler
flames and smoking are therefore The fuel filler flap is to the rear on the flap.
prohibited when handling fuels. right.  Only fill the tank until the pump noz-
Switch off the engine and the auxil- zle switches off.
iary heating* before refuelling.  Replace the fuel filler cap 2. Close
E2_F1 it by turning it clockwise.
B13+16_P88.60-2100-31 You will hear fuel filler cap 2 lock.
Risk of injury G  Close fuel filler flap 1 until you
hear the catch engage.
Do not allow fuel to come into con-
tact with skin or clothing. i
Your health could be damaged if: Vehicles with a diesel engine:
 you spill fuels onto your skin If you have run the tank dry, it will
1 Fuel filler flap
be necessary to bleed the fuel sys-
 you inhale fuel vapours 2 Fuel filler cap
tem ( page 427).
3 Retainer for fuel filler cap
4 Tyre pressures table
 Remove the key from the ignition
lock.
 Open fuel filler flap 1 by pressing
in the direction of the arrow.
The fuel filler flap folds open.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 303


Operation
Refuelling

Petrol (EN 228) i !


You will generally find information The following may lead to increased
! on petrol quality on the filling pump. wear or engine damage:
Refuel using only unleaded premi- Otherwise ask your filling station at-  Using diesel which does not
um grade petrol with a minimum oc- tendant. meet the requirements of
tane number of 95 RON/85 MON
As a temporary measure you may EN 590
conforming to European standard
EN 228. also use unleaded standard petrol,  Using marine diesel fuel
91 RON/82.5 MON. This may re-
Otherwise you could: duce power and increase petrol con-  Using heating oil
 impair engine output sumption. Avoid the use of full  Using vegetable oil methyl ester
throttle. (VME)
 damage the engine
Your warranty entitlement will be re-
You will find further information
about petrol in the "Technical data" Diesel (EN 590) stricted if you use non-approved fu-
section ( page 481). els and/or fuel additives such as
i these.
You will generally find information
about diesel quality on the filling
Low outside temperatures
pump.
To prevent operating problems, diesel
The engine oil should be changed every with improved cold flow qualities is
4,600 miles (7,500 km) in countries available during the winter months. You
where only diesel fuel with a sulphur can use this "winter diesel" at tempera-
content exceeding 0.5 percent by tures down to about –20 °C.
weight is available.

304 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Refuelling

To improve flow properties, it is possi-


Vegetable oil methyl ester
ble to mix diesel with kerosene and flow Risk of injury G (PME fuels)*
improver.
Only the models with the special option
Please note that a mixture of diesel
! of the vegetable oil methyl ester speci-
and kerosene is more easily ignited fication* may be refuelled with biofuels.
Do not refuel with petrol. Never mix
than normal diesel. It is possible to refuel these models
diesel with petrol. This would dam-
age the fuel system. with biofuels and diesel.
Only mix diesel with kerosene in a Outside Summer Kero- Biofuels do not attain the same quality
container which has been approved tempera- diesel fuel sene as winter diesel. We recommend using
for holding fuels; do not mix them in ture standard winter diesel fuel at tempera-
the fuel tank. tures below –10 °C.
–15 °C to 80% 20%
–23 °C  If the vehicle has not been used
 Add a maximum of 50% kerosene or for a long time (more than about
–23 °C to 50% 50%
flow improver to the diesel. two weeks), we recommend that
–30 °C
 Put the kerosene into the container you first fill up with standard diesel
Outside Winter Kero- fuel and then drive the vehicle for
first, then add the diesel.
tempera- diesel fuel sene 30 minutes.
After a few minutes' driving, the ture
mixture will spread to all parts of
–25 °C to 80% 20%
the fuel system.
–30 °C
The mixing ratio depends on the type of
–30 °C to 50% 50%
diesel and the outside temperature.
–35 °C
However, keep the concentration of
flow improver as low as possible.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 305


Operation
Engine compartment

Bonnet
Risk of injury G
Risk of accident G The engine has an electronic ignition
system which carries a high voltage. P 88.40-2275-31
Do not pull the release lever while For this reason, you must never
the vehicle is in motion. The bonnet touch the ignition system compo-
could otherwise open. nents (ignition coil, ignition cables,
spark plug connections, test socket)
Opening while:
 the engine is running 1 Bonnet release lever
Risk of injury G  the engine is being started  Pull release lever 1 in the driver's
footwell.
 the ignition is switched on and
There is a risk of injury if the bonnet The bonnet is released.
the engine is being cranked by
is open, even if the engine is not run- hand
ning.
The radiator fan is located between
Parts of the engine can become very the radiator and the engine. The radi-
hot. ator fan may run on after the engine
To avoid burning yourself, only has been switched off. The fan will
touch those components described not, however, switch on unexpected-
in the Owner's Manual and observe ly if the engine is switched off. Do
the relevant safety notes. not reach into the engine compart-
ment while the fan is running. Other-
wise you could be injured.

306 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Engine compartment

 Pull handle 2 of the bonnet catch


Engine oil
outwards from the radiator trim and
lift the bonnet from underneath by Depending on how it is driven, the vehi-
the radiator grille. cle consumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil
P 88.40-2213-31 per 620 miles (1,000 km). Oil consump-
tion may exceed this if:
Closing
 the vehicle is new

Risk of injury G  you regularly drive at high engine


speeds
Make sure that nobody can be The oil consumption can only be esti-
2 Bonnet catch handle trapped as you close the bonnet. mated after a considerable distance
has been covered.
! You will find further information about
 Lower the bonnet and let it fall from
Do not lift the bonnet by handle 2. a height of about 20 cm. engine oil in the "Technical data" sec-
Make sure that the windscreen wip- tion ( page 492).
You will hear the bonnet catch en-
ers are not folded away from the gage.
windscreen, otherwise the wind- !
screen wipers or the bonnet could  Check that the bonnet has engaged Lubricant additives may not be
be damaged. properly. used since they lead to increased
If the bonnet can be raised slightly, wear and damage to the assem-
 Lift the bonnet slightly. it is not properly engaged. Open it blies. The use of such additives may
again and close it with a little more result in limitation of warranty
Handle 2 extends.
force. rights. You can obtain further infor-
mation from any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 307


Operation
Engine compartment

Checking the engine oil level After measuring, the following mes- If you see the following message:
sages may appear: Turn on ignition to see en-
When you check the oil level, the vehi-
 Engine oil level OK gine oil level!
cle must:
 Turn the key to position 2 in the ig-
 be standing level  Add 1.0 litre to reach
max. oil level! nition ( page 31).
 be at normal operating temperature
 Add 1.5 litres to You will see the following message if
 have been standing with the engine the required waiting time is not ob-
reach max. oil level!
switched off for at least five min- served:
utes  Add 2.0 litres to Observe waiting period
reach max. oil level!
Check the engine oil level using the op-  Repeat the measurement after
erating system.  Top up the oil if necessary about five minutes when the engine
( page 309). is at normal operating temperature.
 Turn the key to position 2 in the ig-
nition ( page 31).  Repeat the measurement after
Other messages in the multi-
The standard display appears in about 30 minutes when the engine
function display is not at normal operating tempera-
the multi-function display
( page 135). If the engine is at normal operating tem- ture.
perature and there is too much oil, you You will see the following message if
 Press the k or j button on
will see the following message: the engine is running:
the steering wheel repeatedly until
Engine oil level Reduce oil Engine oil level Not when
the following message appears in
level! engine on!
the multi-function display:
 Have excess oil siphoned off.
Engine oil level Measu-
ring now !
There is a risk of damage to the en-
gine or the catalytic converter if
there is excess oil in the engine.

308 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Engine compartment

 Switch off the engine and wait


about five minutes before taking Environmental note H
the measurement if the engine is at
normal operating temperature. When topping up the oil, take care
E2_F1
not to spill any. Oil must not be al-
i B15__P18.40-2121-31 lowed to escape into the soil or wa-
If you wish to cancel the measure-
terways. You would otherwise be
ment, press the k or j but-
damaging the environment.
ton on the multi-function steering
wheel.
Oil level in the automatic
Topping up the engine oil Example of a vehicle with a diesel transmission*
engine
There is no need for you to check the oil
1 Filler neck cap level in the automatic transmission. In
 Unscrew cap 1 on the filler neck.
the event of oil loss or problems with
gear shifts, have the automatic trans-
E2_F1  Top up the oil. mission checked at a qualified special-
B14__P18.40-2120-31 Do not add too much oil. ist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
!
Have excess oil siphoned off. There
is a risk of damage to the engine or
the catalytic converter if there is ex-
Example of a vehicle with a petrol cess oil in the engine.
engine
 Screw cap 1 onto the filler neck.
1 Filler neck cap

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 309


Operation
Engine compartment

Checking the coolant level  Turn cap 2 further anti-clockwise


Coolant
and remove it.
The expansion tank is located in the
Risk of injury G engine compartment on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
There is sufficient coolant in expan-
sion tank 3 if:
The cooling system is pressurised.  the coolant reaches marker bar
Therefore, only unscrew the cap 1 in the filler neck when the
coolant is cold
once the engine has cooled down.
You could otherwise be scalded by E2_F1  the coolant level is slightly high-
hot coolant. er than this when the coolant is
B16__P20-30-2179-31
hot
Coolant is a mixture of water and anti-  Top up the coolant if necessary.
freeze and corrosion inhibitor. Only  Replace cap 2 by turning it to the
check the coolant level when the vehi- stop.
cle is standing level and the engine has
You will find further information about
cooled down. 1 Marker bar coolant in the "Technical data" section
2 Cover ( see page 494).
3 Expansion tank
 Slowly turn cap 2 by half a turn
anti-clockwise and allow excess
pressure to escape.

310 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Engine compartment

Windscreen washer system, Opening the windscreen washer


headlamp cleaning system* Risk of fire G fluid reservoir
The windscreen washer fluid reservoir  Pull cap 1 upwards by the tab.
Windscreen washer concentrate
is located in the engine compartment
on the right when viewed in the direc- is highly flammable. Fire, naked Closing the windscreen washer
tion of travel. The headlamp cleaning flames and smoking are therefore fluid reservoir
system* is also supplied from the wind- prohibited when you are handling
 Press cap 1 onto the filler neck un-
screen washer fluid reservoir. windscreen washer concentrate.
til it fully engages.
.

Use: !
 a washer fluid additive, e.g. Use only windscreen washer fluid
MB summerwash, for tempera- suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Un-
E2_F1
tures above freezing point, to suitable windscreen washer fluid
B16__P82.35-2260-31 prevent smearing. may cause damage to the plastic
lenses of the headlamps.
 a washer fluid additive, e.g.
MB winterwash, when there is a
risk of frost, to prevent the wa-
ter from freezing on the wind-
screen.
1 Cap
Mix the windscreen washer fluid in
 Add windscreen washer concen-
a container beforehand. Adapt the
trate to the washer fluid all year
mixing ratio to suit the outside tem-
round.
peratures ( page 497).

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 311


Operation
Tyres and wheels

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- Retreaded tyres are not tested or rec- Modification work on the brake system
ommends that you only use tyres which ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since and wheels is not permitted, nor is
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz previous damage cannot always be de- the use of spacer plates or brake dust
specifically for your vehicle. These tyres tected on retreaded tyres. As a result, shields. Any such modifications will in-
are specially adapted for use with the Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehi- validate the vehicle's general operating
control systems, such as ABS or ESP. cle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. permit.
If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz

G
cannot accept any responsibility for
damage which may occur. Information Risk of accident
about tyres can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Only use the wheel dimensions list-
ed in your vehicle documents. If oth-
If you fit tyres other than those tested
er wheels are fitted:
and recommended by Mercedes-Benz,
characteristics such as handling, noise  the wheel brakes or chassis
emissions and fuel consumption, etc. components could be damaged
may be adversely affected. In addition,  the free travel of the wheels and
when driving with a load, dimensional tyres can no longer be guaran-
variations and different tyre deforma- teed
tion characteristics could cause the
tyres to make contact with the body-
work and axle components. This may
damage the tyre or the vehicle.

312 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Tyres and wheels

Points to remember ! Tyre pressures


 Only fit tyres and wheels of the Store tyres in a cool, dry place, pref-
same type and make. erably in the dark. Protect the tyres
from oil, grease, petrol and diesel.
Risk of accident G
 Only fit tyres of the correct size
onto the wheels. Do not clean your wheels with acidic If the tyre pressures drop repeated-
wheel cleaners since these could ly:
 Run in new tyres at moderate
corrode the wheel bolts.
speeds for the first 60 miles  inspect the tyre for foreign ob-
(100 km). jects
 Check the tyres and wheels regular- Direction of rotation
 check whether the tyre is punc-
ly for damage. Tyres with a specified direction of rota- tured or the valve is leaking
tion have additional benefits, e.g. in re-
 If the vehicle has been loaded,
spect of aquaplaning. These benefits
check the tyre pressures and cor- Only correct tyre pressures when the
will only be available to you if the cor-
rect them if necessary. tyres are cold.
rect direction of rotation is observed.
 Do not continue to use tyres with The pressure of warm tyres should only
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre in-
severely worn treads. Tyre grip de- be corrected if it is too low for the cur-
dicates its correct direction of rotation.
creases rapidly on wet roads when rent operating conditions. Warm tyres
the tread depth drops below 3 mm. i always have higher pressures than cold
 Fit new tyres on the front wheels You may fit a spare tyre* against the ones.
first if tyres of the same size are re- direction of rotation. You will find a table of tyre pressures for
quired on the front and rear wheels. different operating conditions on the in-
 Replace the tyres after six years at side of your vehicle's fuel filler flap.
the latest, regardless of wear. This
also applies to the spare wheel.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 313


Operation
Tyres and wheels

i If you measure the tyre pressure in- i


doors where the temperature differs
Tyre pressure values given for low Once the system has been activat-
from the outside temperature, you will
loads are minimum values which of- ed, the current tyre pressure values
have to correct the measured value ac-
fer you good ride comfort character- will be displayed only after you have
cordingly.
istics. been driving for a few minutes.
When the vehicle is driven, the tyre
You can, however, also use the val-
temperature, and with it the tyre pres- You can select the unit of measurement
ues for higher loads. These are per-
sure, will increase depending on the for the tyre pressure using the operat-
missible and will not adversely affect
road speed and the load on the tyres. ing system ( see page 146).
the running of the vehicle. However,
ride comfort will be impaired to
some degree. Checking the tyre pressure i
electronically* The tyre pressure values indicated in
Also check the tyre pressure of the the operating system may differ
spare wheel*. The tyre pressure monitoring system
only operates when an appropriate from those measured at a filling sta-
wheel electronic unit is fitted to all tion with a pressure gauge. The op-
erating system will give a more
Environmental note H wheels. This system monitors the pres-
sure in all four tyres. The tyre pressure accurate value.
is set when you activate the tyre pres-
Check tyre pressure regularly, at sure monitoring system. The monitor-  Switch on the ignition.
least every two weeks. ing system warns you when the  Press the j or k button on
pressure drops in one or more of the the multi-function steering wheel
Tyre pressure changes by approximate- tyres. repeatedly until you see the current
ly 0.1 bar for every 10 °C change in am- You can call up the tyre pressure using pressure of each tyre in the multi-
bient temperature. the operating system ( page 135). function display.

314 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Tyres and wheels

Activating the tyre pressure


The tyre pressure monitoring sys-
de P 54.30-5350-31 monitoring system
en P54.30-5554-31 tem is not able to warn you of a sud-
den loss of pressure, e.g. following The tyre pressure monitoring system
fr P54.30-5555-31
must be activated if you have:
it P54.30-5556-31 penetration by a foreign object. If
sp P54.30-5557-31 this occurs, bring the vehicle to a  changed the tyre pressure
halt by braking carefully. Do not  changed the wheels or tyres
The current tyre pressure for each make any sudden steering move-  fitted new wheels or tyres
wheel will be displayed. ments when doing this.
 Make sure that the tyre pressure is
set to the correct level.
Risk of accident G i  Make sure that the ignition is
The operation of the tyre pressure switched on.
The tyre pressure monitoring sys- monitoring system can suffer inter-
The standard display menu should
tem does not warn you of an incor- ference if radio transmitting equip-
be displayed in the multi-function
rectly set tyre pressure. The table in ment (e.g. radio headphones, two-
display ( page 135).
way radios) is being operated in or
the fuel filler flap will help you de-
near the vehicle.  Press the j or k button on
cide whether the tyre pressures the multi-function steering wheel
should be corrected. until you see the current pressure
of each tyre in the multi-function
display.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 315


Operation
Tyres and wheels

i Or if you wish to deactivate the tyre


Interchanging the wheels
pressure monitoring system:
If you have a deflated tyre in the ve-
hicle, do not reactivate the tyre pres-  Press the ç button. Risk of accident G
sure monitoring system until:
If one of the following messages ap-
 the deflated tyre has been re- Only interchange the front and rear
pears in the multi-function display:
moved from the vehicle wheels if they are of the same size.
 Reactivate tyre press.
 you have set the correct tyre
monitor!
pressure The wheels may be interchanged every
 Tyre pressure 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
 Press the reset button on the left of Check tyres! 10,000 km), depending on the degree
the instrument cluster ( page 20).  Check the pressures of all the tyres of tyre wear, provided that the vehicle
The following message appears in and correct them if necessary. has the same size wheels front and
rear. Do not reverse the direction of
the multi-function display:  Reactivate the tyre pressure moni-
Monitor current tyre rotation.
toring system* ( page 315).
tyre pressure? The wear patterns on the front and rear
 Press the æ button.
wheels differ depending on the operat-
ing conditions. Interchange the wheels
The following message appears in before too definite a wear pattern has
the multi-function display: formed on the tyres. The front tyres typ-
Tyre press. monitor acti- ically wear more on the outer shoulder
vated! and the rear tyres in the centre.
Tyre pressure displayed
after driv. a few mins.

316 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Tyres and wheels

Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel


and the brake disc thoroughly every Risk of accident G Risk of accident G
time a wheel is interchanged. Check the
tyre pressure and reactivate the tyre Have the tightening torque checked The wheels could work loose if they
pressure monitoring system* if neces- after every wheel change at a quali- are not tightened to a tightening
sary.
fied specialist workshop which has torque of 130 Nm.
! the necessary specialist knowledge For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
Electronic components will be lo- and tools to carry out the work re- recommends that you only use
cated in the wheel if your vehicle is quired. wheel bolts of the correct size, and
fitted with a tyre pressure monitor- Mercedes-Benz recommends a which have been approved for
ing system*. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Tyre fitting tools should not be ap- this purpose. In particular, work rel-
plied in the area of the valve, as this evant to safety or on safety-related
could damage the electronic com- systems must be carried out at a
ponents. qualified specialist workshop.
Always have the tyres replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 317


Operation
Winter driving

Have your vehicle "winterproofed" at a Always observe the maximum permit-


Winter tyres
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a ted speed specified for the winter tyres
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, at the Use winter tyres at temperatures below you have fitted. If you fit winter tyres
onset of winter. This service includes +7 °C and on snow or ice-covered which have a lower maximum permitted
the following: roads. Only then can the maximum ef- speed than that of the vehicle, affix an
fect of the ABS, ESP and 4MATIC* driv- appropriate warning sign in the driver's
 Engine oil change, ing systems be ensured in winter too.
if the current oil has not been ap- field of vision. This is available from a
proved for winter use Use winter tyres of the same make and qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
tread on all wheels to maintain safe Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
 The antifreeze/anti-corrosion con- handling characteristics.
centration will be checked In such circumstances, you should also
restrict the maximum speed of the vehi-
 Concentrated cleaning agent will be
added to the windscreen and head-
Risk of accident G cle to the maximum permitted speed
for the winter tyres using permanent
lamp cleaning system fluid* Speedtronic ( page 241).
You must replace winter tyres with a
 The battery will be checked tread depth of less than 4 mm im-
 A tyre change mediately. They are no longer suita-
ble for winter use.

318 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Winter driving

If you are intending to fit snow chains,


Risk of accident G In particular, work relevant to safety
or on safety-related systems must
please bear the following points in
mind:
be carried out at a qualified special-
If you fit the spare wheel* when driv-  Snow chains cannot be fitted on all
ing with winter tyres, please be ist workshop. wheel/tyre combinations.
aware that driving stability will be  Only fit snow chains to the rear
impaired owing to unstable corner- Snow chains wheels, even on vehicles with
ing characteristics caused by the On vehicles with Airmatic DC*, if you 4MATIC*. Observe the fitting in-
different tyres. You should therefore have fitted snow chains you may only structions issued by the manufac-
adapt your driving style and drive drive at raised vehicle ride height turer.
carefully. ( page 248).  For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
Have the spare wheel* replaced at You should not exceed the maximum recommends that you only use
the nearest qualified specialist permissible speed of 30 mph snow chains which have been spe-
(50 km/h). If you are not driving on cially approved for Mercedes-Benz
workshop which has the necessary
snow, remove the snow chains as soon vehicles.
specialist knowledge and tools to
as possible.
carry out the work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a i
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for You may wish to deactivate ESP
this purpose. when pulling away with snow chains
fitted ( page 79). This will help you
to achieve a favourable cutting ac-
tion.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 319


Operation
Fording on roads

If you have to drive on stretches of road


on which water has collected, please
note that:
 the maximum still water height per-
mitted for fording is 25 cm
 the maximum speed you may drive
at is walking speed

!
Note that vehicles in front or on-
coming vehicles create waves. This
may mean that the maximum per-
mitted water height is exceeded.
You must observe these notes,
otherwise damage may occur to
the:
 engine
 electrical system and
 the transmission

320 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Driving abroad
 Driving abroad
An extensive network of Mercedes-
Benz Service Centres is also at your dis- Risk of injury G
posal when you are travelling abroad.
The appropriate workshop directories Vehicles with xenon headlamps*:
are available from any Mercedes-Benz P 82.10-2899-31
Service Centre. Risk of injury from high voltage. Have
the xenon headlamps* switched to
Only low-octane fuel is available in cer-
symmetrical dipped beam at a quali-
tain countries.
fied specialist workshop, e.g. a
You will find further information about Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
fuel grades in the "Operation" section
( page 303). 1 Switchover lever

Symmetrical dipped-beam  Switch over lever 1.


headlamps  Replace the cap.
If your journey takes you to countries P 82.10-2898-31
where vehicles are driven on the oppo-
!
site side of the road to the country Remember to switch your head-
where the vehicle is registered, your lamps back to asymmetrical dipped
headlamps must be switched to sym- beam when you return to the coun-
metrical dipped-beam. try in which your vehicle is regis-
tered.
Oncoming traffic will be dazzled less.
1 Cap
 Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and re-
move it.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 321


Operation
Trailer towing*

You will find details of installation di-  Pull telescope lever 1 out for-
mensions and loads in the "Technical wards.
data" section ( page 472).  Pull telescope lever 1 upwards.
E2_F1
i The ball coupling disengages and
Fold the ball coupling in if you are B 17+1_P31.10-2760-31 folds out from under the rear bump-
not using the trailer tow hitch. er.
Indicator lamp 2 flashes.
Folding out the ball coupling  Guide telescope lever 1 back
The telescope lever is under the left- again.
hand luggage compartment mat. 1 Telescope lever
2 Indicator lamp
i
In vehicles with a folding bench
seat, first remove the folding bench Risk of accident G
seat cushion ( page 267) and fold
up the footwell tray ( page 341). Make sure that the ball coupling is
engaged (indicator lamp 2 is not
lit) in both the extended and retract-
ed positions.
Do not pull telescope lever 1 if a
trailer is attached. The trailer could
otherwise come loose.

322 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Trailer towing*

Driving tips
Risk of accident G
Risk of accident G For vehicles without level control,
E2_F1
the height of the ball coupling will
Maximum care and attention is
B 17+2_P31.10-2761-31 alter according to the load placed on
called for when coupling and decou-
the vehicle.
pling a trailer.
When folding out the ball coupling,
Do not uncouple a trailer with an
make sure that it has engaged prop-
overrun brake when the brake is en-
erly in the end position. The indica-
gaged. You could otherwise trap
 Press the ball coupling manually in your hand between the bumper and
tor lamp in the telescope lever is not
the direction of the arrow until it en- lit.
drawbar.
gages in a vertical position.
If the Trailer tow hitch,
There is a danger of the trailer
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. Check lock mech.! display ap-
breaking away if it is incorrectly at-
The Trailer tow hitch, pears while you are driving, pull over
tached to the towing vehicle.
Check lock mech.! message is immediately and check that the ball
shown in the multi-function display Make sure that the following values coupling is correctly engaged in the
until the ball coupling is engaged. are not exceeded: end position.
 Remove the protective cap from the  permitted trailer drawbar nose-
ball coupling. weight
 permitted trailer load
 permitted rear axle load of the
towing vehicle
 the permitted maximum gross
vehicle weight

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 323


Operation
Trailer towing*

Fuel consumption is higher when tow- The maximum permissible trailer


Risk of injury G ing a trailer. drawbar noseweight on the trailer
When loading the trailer, make sure tow hitch is 75 kg. The weight must
Make sure that no-one is between that the following are not exceeded: not, however, exceed the figure giv-
the trailer and the vehicle when the  the permitted maximum gross vehi- en on the trailer tow hitch and trail-
latter is being reversed up to the cle weight er identification plates.
trailer.
 the permitted trailer load for the ve- We recommend utilising the maximum
hicle permissible noseweight, and always at
The vehicle's handling characteristics
 the trailer tow hitch trailer load least 50 kg. The vehicle's payload must
will be different when driven with a trail-
er than when driven without. Pay atten-  and the maximum permissible trail- be reduced to compensate for the
tion to these changes. er drawbar noseweight on the trail- noseweight so that the maximum per-
er tow hitch ball coupling. missible rear axle load is not exceeded.
The vehicle/trailer combination:
We recommend that a maximum speed
 is heavier i of 50 mph (80 km/h) should not be ex-
 is restricted in its acceleration and The maximum permissible weights ceeded, even in countries where higher
gradient climbing ability are given in the vehicle documents speeds are allowed.
and on the trailer and trailer tow
 has an increased stopping distance Avoid sudden braking. Apply the brakes
hitch identification plates. The low- lightly at first to allow the trailer to run
 is affected more by strong cross- est value given is decisive. on. Then increase the braking force rap-
winds
idly.
 demands more sensitive steering

324 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Trailer towing*

Driving tips !
 Maintain a greater distance from Risk of accident G Do not decouple a trailer with over-
the vehicle in front than when driv- run brake between the bumper and
ing without a trailer. On no account should you attempt drawbar, otherwise your vehicle
to draw the vehicle/trailer combi- could be damaged by the spring ac-
 Avoid braking abruptly. If possible,
brake gently at first to allow the nation out by increasing speed. tion of the overrun brake.
trailer to run on. Then increase the
braking force rapidly.
 The vehicle's payload must be re- Risk of injury G
duced to compensate for the nose-
weight so that the maximum per- Do not uncouple a trailer with an
missible rear axle load is not overrun brake when the brake is en-
exceeded. gaged. The spring action of the over-
 The gradient-climbing capabilities run brake could otherwise trap your
from a standstill are correct for sea hand between the bumper and the
level. When driving in mountainous drawbar.
areas, note that the power output of
the engine, and with it its gradient
climbing capability, decrease with
increasing altitude.
If the trailer swings from side to side:
 Do not accelerate.
 Do not countersteer.
 Brake if necessary.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 325


Operation
Trailer towing*

 Pull telescope lever 1 out for-  Press the ball coupling manually in
Folding in the ball coupling
wards. the direction of the arrow until it en-
 Pull telescope lever 1 upwards.
gages behind the bumper.

The ball coupling disengages and Indicator lamp 2 in the luggage


folds down under the rear bumper. compartment goes out and the
E2_F1 message in the multi-function dis-
B 17+1_P31.10-2760-31 Indicator lamp 2 flashes. play disappears.
 Guide telescope lever 1 back
again.

1 Telescope lever
E2_F1
2 Indicator lamp
 Place the protective cap on the ball
B 17+3_P31.10-2762-31
coupling.

Risk of injury G
Make sure that no persons or ani-
mals are in the pivoting range of the
ball coupling. Otherwise they could
be injured.

326 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Trailer towing*

Permanent current Trailer with 7-pin connector Fitting the adapter cable
The trailer power socket is equipped If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you  Lift up the cover.
with a permanent current connection can connect it using an adapter cable.  Insert the connector with lug 1
(to PIN 9) when delivered from the fac- You can obtain the adapter cable from into groove 2 and turn it clockwise
tory. This can be used for accessories a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a to the stop.
with a maximum power consumption of Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
 Allow the cover to engage.
240 W.
 Secure the adapter cable to the
i trailer using cable ties.
Do not charge the trailer battery
P 31.10-2419-31 !
using the permanent current con-
nection, as this could discharge the Make sure that there is sufficient
cable play so that the cable cannot
vehicle battery.
become detached when cornering.

1 Lug
2 Groove

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 327


Operation
Service

ASSYST PLUS, the Active Service Sys-


from Clearing the service indicator
tem, tells you when the next service is
due. A minor service The service indicator automatically dis-
appears after 30 seconds. You can also
Approximately one month before the to clear the service indicator yourself.
next service is due, one of the following H major service
messages will appear in the multi-func-
tion display while you are driving the ig-
nition is switched on: i
The extra + following the service
Service A in.. days E2_F1
type indicates the degree of wear of
Service A in.. km
the brake pads. B8_P54.25-3603-31
Service A due now
The brake pads may reach their
wear limit before the next service is
due. You can have the brake pads
P 54.30-5728-31 replaced:
 during this service 1 Reset button
or  Press reset button 1 on the left in
 during subsequent extra main- the instrument cluster.
The letter following Service informs
tenance work
the workshop how long is required for
the service work to be carried out. The time between individual servic-
es depends on your style of driving.
A moderate style of driving at medi-
um engine speeds and avoiding
short trips will increase this time.

328 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Service

Missing the service due date Calling up the service due Resetting the service
If you have missed the service due date, date indicator
the following messages will appear in  Make sure that the ignition is If your vehicle is ever serviced other
the multi-function display: switched on. than at a qualified specialist workshop
Service A or a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre,
The standard display appears in
exceeded by.. days you can reset the service indicator
the multi-function display
Service A yourself. You will find further informa-
( page 130).
exceeded by.. km tion in the maintenance manual.
 Press the k or j button on
You will also hear an audible signal.
the multi-function steering wheel
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a repeatedly until you see the 9
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will re- service symbol with the service due
set the service indicator on the service date in the multi-function display.
due date.
i
i Periods when the vehicle battery is
Failure to have the service per- disconnected from electrical con-
formed by the specified date may in- sumers will not be recorded by the
validate warranty and ex gratia timed service indicator. You must
claims as well as mobilo-life obliga- therefore subtract such periods
tions. from the service due date yourself.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 329


Operation
Service

 Press and hold the reset button on


Reading off the workshop
the left in the instrument cluster for
code
approximately five seconds E2_F2
The workshop code contains vehicle- ( page 328).
specific information concerning the full, de P P54.32-2401-31
current scope of service work to be car- You will see the Service menu.
ried out. When you are arranging a date
for a service, you could inform the serv-  Press the ÿ button.
ice adviser of the workshop code. Using
E2__F1 The multiple digit workshop code
this code, the service adviser is able to
inform you of the service work to be de P P54.32-2400-31 number is highlighted.
carried out and an approximate cost.  Press the è button.
 Make sure that the ignition is The Service menu reappears.
switched on.  Press the æ or ç button to
 Press the è button again.
select the Service data sub-
The standard display appears in menu. You have exited the Service menu
the multi-function display and you can now see the 9 serv-
( page 130). ice symbol with the service due
 Press the k or j button on date again.
the multi-function steering wheel
repeatedly until you see the 9
service symbol with the service due
date in the multi-function display.

330 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Service

 Press and hold the reset button on


Setting due dates
the left in the instrument cluster for
You can use ASSYST PLUS to set the approximately five seconds
dates on which the general inspection ( page 328). F2_E1
and exhaust gas analysis for your vehi-
cle are due. Approximately one month You will see the Service menu. de P P54.32-2403-31
before the due date you have entered, a  Press the æ or ç button to
corresponding message will appear in select the Addit. work sub-  Press the æ or ç button to
the multi-function display while you are menu. move the bar to the Month or Ye-
driving or the ignition is switched on. ar setting.
 Press the ÿ button.
 Make sure that the ignition is  Press the k or j button to
The Addit. work function is se-
switched on. set the Month and the Year.
lected.
The standard display appears in the  Press the æ or ç button to
 Press the æ or ç button to
multi-function display ( page 130) move the bar to the Confirm op-
select the Exh.-gas analysis
 Press the k or j button on or General Inspection func- tion.
the multi-function steering wheel tion.  Press the ÿ button.
repeatedly until you see the 9
service symbol with the service due The new due date is set.
date in the multi-function display.  Press the è button repeatedly
F2__E1 until the standard display appears.
de P P54.32-2402-31 ASSYST PLUS recalculates the val-
ues. During this time you cannot
call up the service display or the
 Press the ÿ button. service menu.
The Next due date menu is se-
lected.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 331


Operation
Care

The value of your vehicle will be re-  Insect remains !


tained by regular and proper care. The  Bird droppings Do not affix:
best way to protect your vehicle from
harmful environmental influences is to  Tree resin  unsuitable stickers
wash it and use protective treatments  Oils and grease  films
regularly.
 Fuel  magnetic plates or similar
i  Tar stains to painted surfaces, otherwise you
It is preferable to use Mercedes- could damage the paintwork.
Benz care products. They have
been specially developed for
Risk of poisoning G
Additional notes on care for AMG vehi-
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and are cles with Nubuck leather upholstery:
Always follow the instructions for
regularly upgraded in keeping with
using the care products. This Nubuck leather has already been
technical progress. Mercedes-Benz
treated with a protective film. For this
care products are available from Always keep care products tightly
reason do not use:
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. closed and out of the reach of chil-
 MB leather care agent
dren.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas af-  MB stain remover
fected by corrosion and damage
 special solvent cleaning agents
H
caused by neglect or inadequate care
cannot always be completely repaired. Environmental note Avoid rubbing hard on the leather up-
In such cases, visit a qualified specialist holstery. Remove any dirt using a damp
workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Dispose of empty containers, clean- microfibre cloth.
Service Centre, immediately. ing cloths and polishing wads in an
environmentally-responsible man-
Repair damage caused by loose chip-
pings and remove the following immedi- ner.
ately:

332 Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03)


Operation
Care

Caring for the exterior of your ! High-pressure cleaners


vehicle Make sure that the automatic car !
wash is suitable for the size of the
Do not use high-pressure cleaners
Automatic car wash vehicle.
with round-spray jets for cleaning
You can clean the vehicle in an auto- Fold in the exterior mirrors before the tyres. You could otherwise dam-
matic car wash from the very start, but the vehicle is washed. Make sure age the tyres. Replace damaged
preferably one without brushes. that the windscreen wiper switch is tyres.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it be- set to 0 ( page 50). The exterior
fore you drive into the car wash. mirrors or windscreen wipers could  The minimum distance between the
otherwise be damaged. high-pressure cleaner nozzle and
After using an automatic car wash, wipe
the vehicle must be approximately
off wax from the windscreen and the
i 30 cm.
wiper blades. This will prevent smear-
ing. Make sure that mirrors are fully fold-  Move the high-pressure cleaner
ed out when you leave the automatic nozzle around when cleaning your
car wash. They could otherwise vi- vehicle.
Risk of accident G brate.
!
The vehicle is braked if SBC Hold/ When doing so, do not point directly
SBC Stop* is activated. Therefore, onto door joints, air spring bellows,
deactivate SBC Hold/SBC Stop* electrical components, connectors
before the vehicle is washed in an or seals.
automatic car wash.

Online Version (Edition F1, 06/03) 333


Operation
Care

Cleaning the windscreen  Fold the wiper arm away from the Cleaning the headlamps
windscreen until you feel it engage.